TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions

Question 1.
Solve 2 cos2θ – √3 sin θ + 1 = 0. [May ’09; B.P]
Answer:
Given equation is 2 cos2 θ – √3 sin θ + 1 = 0
⇒ 2(1 – sin2 θ) – √3 sin θ + 1 = 0
⇒ 2 – 2sin2 θ – √3 sin θ + 1=0
⇒ 2 sin2 θ + √3 sin θ – 3 = 0
⇒ 2 sin2 θ + 2 √3 sin θ – √3 sin θ – 3 = 0
⇒ 2 sin θ (sin θ + √3 ) – + √3 (sin θ + √3 ) = 0
⇒ (sin θ + √3)- (2 sin θ – √3) = 0
⇒ sin θ + √3 = 0 (or) 2 sin θ – √3 = 0
⇒ sin 0θ = – J3 (or) sin θ = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)

Case -1: sin θ = -√3 ∉ [- 1, 1 ]
∴ There is no solution set.

Case – II : sin θ = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\) ⇒ sin θ = sin \(\)
∴ Solution set is θ = {nπ + (-1)n α, n ∈ Z} ⇒
θ = {nπ + (-1)n\(\frac{\pi}{3}\) α, n ∈ Z}
∴ The solution of the given equation is
θ = {nπ + (-1)n\(\frac{\pi}{3}\) α, n ∈ Z}

Question 2.
Find all values of x ≠ 0 in (-π, π) satisfying the equation 81+cosx+cos2x+…………….. = 43. [Mar. ’09]
Answer:
Given 81+cosx+cos2x+…………….. = 43
8\(\frac{1}{1-\cos x}\) = 43 [∵ s = \(\frac{a}{1-r}\)]
(23)\(\frac{1}{1-\cos x}\) = 26
2\(\frac{1}{1-\cos x}\) = 26
\(\frac{1}{1-\cos x}\) = 6
1 – cos x = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
⇒ cos x = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
⇒ x = ±\(\frac{\pi}{3}\)
∴ x = \(\frac{\pi}{3}\) (or) –\(\frac{\pi}{3}\) [∵x ∈ (-π, π)]

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions

Question 3.
Solve tan θ + 3 cot θ = 5 sec θ. [Mar. ’02; May ’99, ’84]
Answer:
Given tan θ + 3 cot θ = 5 sec θ
⇒ \(\frac{\sin \theta}{\cos \theta}+3 \cdot \frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}=\frac{5}{\cos \theta}\)
⇒ \(\frac{\sin ^2 \theta+3 \cos ^2 \theta}{\cos \theta \cdot \sin \theta}=\frac{5}{\cos \theta}\)
⇒ sin2 θ + 3 cos2θ = 5 sin θ
⇒ sin2 θ + 3 (1 – sin2θ) = 5 sin θ
⇒ sin2 θ + 3 – 3 sin2θ = 5 sin θ
⇒ 2 sin2θ + 5 sin θ – 3 = 0
⇒ 2 sin2θ + 6 sin θ – sin θ – 3 = 0
⇒ 2 sin θ(sin θ + 3) – 1 (sin θ + 3) = 0
⇒ (sin θ + 3) (2 sin θ – 1) = 0
⇒ sin θ + 3 = 0 (or) 2 sin θ – 1 = 0
⇒ sin θ = -3 (or) sin θ = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Case – I: sin θ = -3 ∈ [-1, 1]
There is no solution set.

Case – II: sin θ = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
⇒ sin θ = sin \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
∴ Solution set is θ = {nπ + (-1)n α, n ∈ Z}
⇒ θ = {nπ + (-1)n \(\frac{\pi}{6}\), n ∈ Z}

∴ The solution set of the given equation is
θ = {nπ + (-1)n \(\frac{\pi}{6}\), n ∈ Z}

Question 4.
Solve 1 + sin2θ = 3sin θ. cos θ. [Mar.(AP & TS) ’17, ’11; May ’00]
Answer:
Given 1 + sin2θ = 3sin θ. cos θ
On dividing both sides with cos2θ, we get
⇒ \(\frac{1}{\cos ^2 \theta}+\frac{\sin ^2 \theta}{\cos ^2 \theta}=\frac{3 \sin \theta \cos \theta}{\cos ^2 \theta}\)
⇒ sec2θ + tan2θ = 3 tanθ
⇒ 1 + tan2θ + tan2θ = 3 tan θ
⇒ 2 tan2θ – 3 tan θ + 1 = 0
⇒ 2 tan2θ – 2 tan θ – tan θ + 1 = 0
⇒ 2 tan θ (tan θ – 1) – l(tan θ – 1) = 0
⇒ (tan θ – 1) (2 tan θ – 1) = 0
⇒ tan θ – 1=0 (or) 2 tan θ – 1 = 0
⇒ tan θ = 1 (or) 2 tan θ = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Case – I: tan θ = 1 ⇒ tan θ = tan \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
∴ Solution set is θ = {nπ + α, n ∈ Z}
⇒ θ = {nπ + \(\frac{\pi}{4}\), n ∈ z}

Case – II: tan θ = 1 ⇒ tan θ = 0.5
⇒ tan θ = tan 26°. 34′
Solution set is θ =
⇒ θ = {nπ + 26°.34′, n ∈ Z)
∴ The solution set of the given equation is
θ = {nπ + \(\frac{\pi}{4}\), n ∈ z} ∪ {nπ + 26°.34′, n ∈ Z}

Question 5.
Solve √2(sin x + cos x) = √3. [Mar. ’16(AP), Mar. 15(AP); May ’12, ’08]
Answer:
Given equation is √2(sin x + cos x) = √3
⇒ sin x + cos x = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
On dividing Both sides with \(\sqrt{a^2+b^2}\)
= \(\sqrt{1^2+1^2}\) = , we get
⇒ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)sin x + \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)cos x = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
⇒ cos x.cos\(\frac{\pi}{4}\) + sin x sin\(\frac{\pi}{4}=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
⇒ cos(x – \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)) = cos\(\frac{\pi}{6}\)

∴ Solution set is θ = {2nπ ± α, n ∈ Z}
⇒ x – \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = {2nπ + \(\frac{\pi}{6}\), n ∈ Z}

Case – I: x – \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = 2nπ + \(\frac{\pi}{6}\), n ∈ Z
x = 2nπ + \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) + \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
x = 2nπ + \(\frac{5\pi}{12}\)
x = {(24n + 5)\(\frac{\pi}{12}\)}, n ∈ Z

Case – II: x – \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = 2nπ – \(\frac{\pi}{6}\), n ∈ Z
x = 2nπ – \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) + \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
x = 2nπ + \(\frac{\pi}{12}\)
x = {(24n + 1)\(\frac{\pi}{12}\)}, n ∈ Z

∴ The solution set of the given equation is
x = {(24n + 5)\(\frac{\pi}{12}\)} ∪ {(24n + 1)\(\frac{\pi}{12}\)}, n ∈ Z

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions

Question 6.
If θ1, θ2 are solutions of the equation a cos 2θ + b sin 2θ = c, tan θ1 ≠ tan θ2 and a + c ≠ 0, then find the values of
(i) tan θ1 + tan θ2
(ii) tan θ1. tan θ2.
Answer:
Given equation is a cos 2θ + b sin 2θ = c
⇒ a\(\left[\frac{1-\tan ^2 \theta}{1+\tan ^2 \theta}\right]\) + b\(\left[\frac{2 \tan \theta}{1+\tan ^2 \theta}\right]\) = c
⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{a}-\mathrm{a} \tan ^2 \theta+2 b \tan \theta}{1+\tan ^2 \theta}\) = c
⇒ a – a tan2θ + 2b tan θ = c + c tan2θ
⇒ c + c tan2θ – a + a tan2θ – 2b tan θ = 0
⇒ (a + c) tan2θ – 2b tan θ + (c – a) = 0 ……… (1)
This is a quadratic equation in tan θ since θ1, θ2 are the roots of the given equation.

tan θ1, tan θ2 are the roots of the equation (1).
i) Sum of the roots = tan θ1 + tan θ2
= \(\frac{-b}{a}=\frac{-(-2 b)}{a+c}\)
tan θ1 + tan θ2 = \(\frac{2 b}{a+c}\)

ii) Product of the roots = tan θ1 . tan θ2
= \(\frac{c}{a}=\frac{c-a}{a+c}\)
tan θ1 . tan θ2 = \(\frac{c}{a}=\frac{c-a}{a+c}\)

Question 7.
Solve : 4 sin x. sin 2x. sin 4x = sin 3x.
Answer:
Given sin 3x = 4 sin x . sin 2x. sin 4x
= 2 sin x (2 sin 2x sin 4x)
= 2 sin x (cos 2x – cos 6x)
⇒ sin 3x = 2 cos 2x sin x – 2 cos 6x sin x
⇒ sin 3x = sin 3x – sin x – 2 cos 6x sin x
⇒ 2 cos 6x sin x + sin x = 0
⇒ sin x (2 cos 6x + 1) = 0
⇒ sin x = 0 or cos 6x = – \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Case (1): sin x = 0 ⇒ x = nπ, n ∈ Z is the general solution.

Case (2): cos 6x = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Principal solution is α = \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\)
General solution is 6x = 2nπ ± \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\)
⇒ x = \(\frac{\mathrm{n} \pi}{3} \pm \frac{\pi}{9}\), n ∈ Z.
∴ The solution set of the given equation is x = {nπ, n ∈ Z} ∪ {\(\frac{\mathrm{n} \pi}{3} \pm \frac{\pi}{9}\), n ∈ Z}

Question 8.
If θ < 0 < π, solve cos θ cos 2θ cos 3θ = \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Answer:
Given equation is cos θ cos 2θ cos 3θ = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
⇒ 4 cos θ cos 2θ cos 3θ = 1
⇒ 2 cos 2θ (2 cos 3θ cosθ) = 1
⇒ 2 cos 2θ [cos (3θ + θ) + cos(3θ – θ)] = 1
⇒ 2 cos 2θ (cos 4θ + cos 2θ) = 1
⇒ 2 cos 4θ cos 2θ + 2 cos2 2θ – 1 = 0
⇒ 2 cos 4θ cos 2θ + cos 4θ = 0
⇒ cos 4θ (2 cos 2θ + 1) = 0
⇒ cos4θ = 0 (or) ⇒ 2 cos 2θ + 1 = 0
cos 2θ = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Case – I: cos 4θ = 0
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions 1
∴ The solutions of the case – I in (0, π) are \(\frac{\pi}{8}, \frac{3 \pi}{8}, \frac{5 \pi}{8}, \frac{7 \pi}{8}\)

Case – II: cos 2θ = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions 2

∴ The solutions of the case – II in (0, π) are \(\frac{\pi}{3}, \frac{2 \pi}{3}\)
∴ The solutions of the given equation in (0, π) are \(\frac{\pi}{8}, \frac{\pi}{3}, \frac{3 \pi}{8}, \frac{5 \pi}{8}, \frac{2 \pi}{3} \frac{7 \pi}{8}\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions

Question 9.
Solve sin 2x – cos 2x = sin x – cos x [Mar. ’99]
Answer:
Given equation is
(sin 2x – sin x) – (cos 2x – cos x) = 0
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions 3
Case – I: sin\(\left(\frac{x}{2}\right)\) = 0
Solution set is θ = {nπ, n ∈ Z}
\(\frac{x}{2}\) = {nπ, n ∈ Z}
x = {2nπ, n ∈ Z}

Case – II: tan\(\left(\frac{3 \mathrm{x}}{2}\right)\) = -1
tan\(\left(\frac{3 \mathrm{x}}{2}\right)\) = tan\(\left(\frac{-\pi}{4}\right)\)
∴ The solution set is θ = {nπ + α, n ∈ Z}
\(\frac{3 x}{2}\) = {n – \(\frac{\pi}{4}\), n ∈ Z}
x = {\(\frac{2 n \pi}{3}-\frac{\pi}{6}\), n ∈ Z}
∴ The solution set of the given equation is x = {2nπ, n ∈ Z} ∪ {\(\frac{2 n \pi}{3}-\frac{\pi}{6}\), n ∈ Z}

Question 10.
Solve 2 cos2θ + 11 sin θ = 7.
Answer:
Given equation is 2 cos2θ + 11 sin θ = 7
⇒ 2(1 – sin2 θ) + 11 sin θ = 7
⇒ -2 sin2 θ + 11 sin θ = 5
⇒ 2 sin2 θ – 11 sin θ + 5 = 0
⇒ 2 sin2 θ – 10 sin θ – sin θ + 5 = 0
⇒ 2 sin θ (sin θ – 5) – 1 (sin θ – 5) = 0
⇒ (2 sin θ – 1) (sin θ – 5) = 0

If sin θ – 5 = 0 then sin θ = 5 is not admissible.
If 2 sin θ – 1 = 0 ⇒ sin θ = \(\frac{1}{4}\) and the principal solution is α = \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
∴ General solution is θ = nπ + (-1)n\(\frac{\pi}{6}\), n ∈ Z.

Question 11.
Solve sin x + √3 cos x = √2. [Mar. ’18(TS); Mar. ’10; May ’98, ’93]
Answer:
Given equation is sin x + √3 cos x = √2
On dividing both sides with \(\sqrt{a^2+b^2}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions 4
Hence the solution set of the given equation is x = {2nπ + \(\frac{5\pi}{12}\), n ∈ Z} ∪ {2nπ – \(\frac{\pi}{12}\), n ∈ Z}

Question 12.
Solve cot 2x – (√3 + 1)cot x + √3 = 0. [Mar. ’14, ’12]
Answer:
Given cot 2x – (√3 + 1)cot x + √3 = 0
⇒ cot 2x – √3 cot x – cot x + √3 = 0
⇒ cot x(cot x – √3) – 1(cot x – √3) = 0
⇒ (cot x – √3) (cot x – 1) = 0
⇒ cot x – √3=0 (or) cot x – 1 = 0
⇒ cot x = √3 (or) cot x = 1
⇒ cot x = cot 30° (or) cot x = cot 45°
⇒ x = 30° (or) x = 45°

General solutions:
x = nπ + 30°, n ∈ Z
Let n = 0 ⇒ x = 30°

General solution:
x = nπ + 45°, n ∈ Z
Let n = 0 ⇒ x = 45°
∴ Solutions set = {30°, 45°}

Question 13.
If x + y = \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\) and sin x + sin y = \(\frac{3}{2}\), find x and y. [Mar. ’97]
Answer:
Given x + y = \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\) …………(1)
sin x + sin y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions 5
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions 6

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions

Some More Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions

Question 1.
If x is acute and sin (x + 10°) = cos (3x – 68°) find x in degrees.
Answer:
Given sin (x + 10°) = cos (3x – 68°)
⇒ sin(x + 10°) = sin[90° + (3x – 68°)]
= sin (22° + 3x)
⇒ x + 10°= nπ + (-1)n (22° + 3x)

If n = 2k (even) k ∈ Z then
x + 10° = 2k7t + (-1)” (22° + 3x)
⇒ 2kπ + (-1)2k (22° + 3x) = 2kπ + 22° + 3x
⇒ 2x = -k(2π) – 12°
⇒ x = \(θ\) = -k(180°) – 6°

If n = 2k + 1 then
x + 10° = (2k + 1) 180° – (22° + 3x)
⇒ 4x = (2k +1) 180° – 32°
⇒ x = (2k + 1)45° – 8°
When k = 0 we get x = 37°
If we take k = 1, 2, ………… the value of x is not acute.
Hence the value of x is 37°.

Question 2.
Solve 5 cos2θ + 7 sin2θ = 6.
Answer:
Given 5 cos2θ + 7 sin2θ = 6
Dividing by cos2θ we get,
5 + 7 tan2θ = 6 sec2θ
⇒ 5 + 7 tan2θ = 6(1 + tan2θ)
⇒ tan2θ – 1 = 0 ⇒ tan2θ = 1 ⇒ tan θ = ±1
θ = nπ ± \(\frac{\pi}{4}\),n ∈ Z is the general solution.

Question 3.
Solve 2 sin2θ – 4 = 5 cos θ.
Answer:
2 sin2θ – 4 = 5 cos θ
⇒ 2(1 – cos2θ) – 5 cos θ – 4 = 0
⇒ 2cos2θ + 5cos θ + 4-2 = 0
⇒ 2cos2θ + 5cos θ + 2 = 0
⇒ 2cos2θ + 4cos θ + cos θ + 2 = 0
⇒ 2cos θ(cos θ + 2) + 1(cos θ + 2) = 0
⇒ (cos θ + 2)(2cos θ + 1) = 0
cos θ + 2 = 0 is not admissible.
Consider 2cos θ + 1 = 0 ⇒ cos θ = –\(\frac{1}{2}\), the principal solution is α = \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\)
∴ General solution is θ = 2nπ ± \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\),n ∈ Z.

Question 4.
Solve 4cos2θ + √3 = 2(√3 + 1)cos θ.
Answer:
4cos2θ – 2(√3 + 1)cosθ + √3 = 0
⇒ 4cos2θ – 2√3cos θ – 2cos θ + √3 =0
⇒ 2cosθ(2cosθ – √3)- 1(2cos θ – √3) = 0
⇒ (2cosθ – 1)(2cosθ – √3) = 0
If cos θ = \(\frac{1}{2}\) then θ = 2nπ ± \(\frac{\pi}{3}\), n ∈ Z is the general solution.
If 2cos θ – √3 = 0 then cos θ = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
Hence the general solution in this case is
θ = 2nπ ± \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) ,n ∈ Z.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions

Question 5.
Solve √3 sin θ – cos θ = √2. [May ’14, Mar. ’18(AP)]
Answer:
Given √3 sin θ – cos θ = √2
Divide both sides by
\(\sqrt{3+1}\) = 2, \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)sin θ – \(\frac{1}{2}\)cos θ = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

∴ The principal solution for θ – \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) is α = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
∴General soIutio is θ – \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) = nπ + (-1)n \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
⇒ θ = \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) + nπ + (-1)n \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)

Question 6.
Solve cos 2θ + cos 8θ = cos 5θ.
Answer:
Given cos 2θ + cos 8θ = cos 5θ
⇒ 2 cos 5θ cos 3θ = cos 5θ
⇒ cos 5θ(2 cos 3θ – 1) = 0
Case (i): cos 5θ = 0
⇒ 5θ = (2n + 1)\(\frac{\pi}{2}\) ⇒ θ = (2n + 1)\(\frac{\pi}{10}\), n ∈ Z

Case (ii): 2cos 3θ – 1 = 0 ⇒ cos 3θ = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Principal solution is α = \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)

∴ General Solution is
3θ = 2nπ ± \(\frac{\pi}{3}\) ⇒ θ = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{n} \pi}{3} \pm \frac{\pi}{9}\), n ∈ Z

∴ General Solutions are
{(2n + 1)\(\frac{\pi}{10}, \frac{2 \mathrm{n} \pi}{3} \pm \frac{\pi}{9}\), n ∈ Z}

Question 7.
Solve cos θ – cos 7θ = sin 4θ.
Answer:
2sin\(\left(\frac{\theta+7 \theta}{2}\right)\) sin\(\left(\frac{7 \theta-\theta}{2}\right)\) = sin 4θ
⇒ 2sin4θ sin 3θ = sin 4θ
⇒ sin 4θ(2 sin 3θ – 1) = 0

Case (i): sin 4θ = 0 ⇒ 4θ = nθ ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{n} \pi}{4}\), n ∈ Z

Case (ii): 2sin 3θ – 1 = 0 ⇒ sin 3θ = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Principal solution is α = \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)

∴ General solution is 3θ = nπ + (-1)n\(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
⇒ θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{n} \pi}{3}\) + (-1)n\(\frac{\pi}{18}\), n ∈ Z

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Trigonometric Equations Important Questions

Question 8.
If tan(π cos θ) = cot (π sin θ), then prove that cos(θ – \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)) = ±\(\frac{1}{2 \sqrt{2}}\). [Mar ’15(TS)]
Answer:
Given that tan(π cos θ)
= cot(π sin θ) = tan(\(\frac{\pi}{2}\) – π cos θ)
∴ π cos θ = ±\(\frac{\pi}{2}\) – π sin θ
⇒ cos θ = ±\(\frac{1}{2}\) – sin θ ⇒ cos θ + sin θ = ±\(\frac{1}{2}\)
⇒ cos θ\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) + sin θ\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}=\pm \frac{1}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
⇒ cos θ cos\(\frac{\pi}{4}\) + sin θ sin\(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = \(\pm \frac{1}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)

Question 9.
If α, β are the solutions of the equation a cos θ + b sin θ = c, where a, b, c ∈ R and if a2 + b2 > 0, cos α ≠ cos β and sin α ≠ sin β then show that
(i) sin α + sin β = \(\frac{2 b c}{a^2+b^2}\)
(ii) cos α + cos β = \(\frac{2 a c}{a^2+b^2}\)
(iii) cos α. cos β = \(\frac{c^2-b^2}{a^2+b^2}\)
(iv) sin α. sin β = \(\frac{c^2-a^2}{a^2+b^2}\)
Answer:
Given acos θ + bsin θ = c ⇒ acos θ = c – bsin θ ⇒ a2cos2θ = c2 – 2bcsinθ + b2sin2θ
⇒ a2 (1 – sin2θ) = c2 – 2bcsinθ + b2 sin2θ
⇒ (a2 + b2)sin2θ – 2bcsinθ + (c2 – a2) = 0
This is a quadratic equation in sin θ and let the roots be sin α and sin β. Then
sin α + sin β = \(\frac{2 b c}{a^2+b^2}\); sin α . sin β = \(\frac{c^2-a^2}{a^2+b^2}\)
Also b sin θ = c – acos θ ⇒ b2sin2θ = c2 -2accos θ + a2cos2θ
⇒ b2(1 – cos2θ) = c2 – 2ac cosθ + a2 cos2θ
⇒ (b2 + a2)cos2θ – 2ac cosθ + (c2 – b2) =0
This is a quadratic equation in cos θ and let cos α, cos β be the roots. Then
cos α + cos β = \(\frac{2 a c}{a^2+b^2}\) and cos α. cos β = \(\frac{c^2-b^2}{a^2+b^2}\)

Hence from above we have
(i) sin α + sin β = \(\frac{2 b c}{a^2+b^2}\)
(ii) cos α + cos β = \(\frac{2 a c}{a^2+b^2}\)
(iii) cos α. cos β = \(\frac{c^2-b^2}{a^2+b^2}\)
(iv) sin α . sin β = \(\frac{c^2-a^2}{a^2+b^2}\)

Question 10.
Give p ≠ ± q, show that the solutions of cos p0 + cos q0 = 0 form two series each of which is in A.P. Also find the common difference of each A.P. [Mar. ’19(AP)]
Answer:
Given equation is cos pθ + cos qθ = 0

which are two A.P.’s is with common differences

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(c) Group-17 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Which halogen produces O2 and O3 on passing through water?
Answer:
Fluorine liberates O2 and O3 with water.
2F2 + 2H2O → 4HF + O2
3F2 + 3H2O → 6HF + O3

Question 2.
Interhalogen compounds are more reactive than the constituent halogens except fluorine- explain.
Answer:
The interhalogen compounds are more reactive than the halogens (except F2). This is because the A-X bond in interhalogens is weaker than the X – X bond in the halogens.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 3.
What is the use of ClF3?
Answer:

  1. ClF3 is a covalent liquid. It is used to make gaseous UF6.
    3ClF3 + U → UF6 + 3ClF
  2. It acts as powerful fluorinating agent for inorganic substances.
    4ClF3 + 6MgO → 6MgF2 + 2Cl2 + 3O2

Question 4.
Write two uses of ClO2.
Answer:

  1. ClO2 is used as a bleaching agent for paper pulp and textiles.
  2. Water treatment.

Question 5.
Why are halogens coloured ?
Answer:
The colour of halogens is due to absorption of visible light by their molecules resulting in excitation of outer electrons to higher energy levels. The excitation energy required by small fluorine atoms is large and that required by the large iodine atoms is least. By absorbing different quanta of radiation, they display different colours. F2 is yellow, Cl2 is greenish yellow, Br2 is red and I2 is violet.

Question 6.
Write the reactions of Cl2 and F2 with water. [IPE ’14]
Answer:

  1. Chlorine dissolves in water to give hydrochloric acid and hypochlorous acid.
    Cl2 + H2O → HCl + HOCl
  2. Fluorine oxidises water to oxygen and ozone.
    2F2 + 2H2O → 4HF + O2
    3F2 + 3H2O → 6HF + O3

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 7.
With which neutral molecule, ClO is iso- electronic? Is that molecule a Lewis base ?
Answer:
ClF is isoelectronic with ClO. ClF is a Lewis base.

Question 8.
Arrange the following in the order of the property indicated for each set.
a) F2,Cl2, Br2, I2 – increasing bond dissociation enthalpy.
b) HF, HCl, HBr, HI – increasing acidic strength.
c) HF, HCl, HBr, HI – increasing boiling points.
Answer:
a) I2 < f2 < Br2 < Cl2
b) HF < HCl < HBr < HI
c) HCl< HBr < HI < HF

Question 9.
Electron gain enthalpy of fluorine is less than that of chlorine. Explain.
Answer:
Fluorine has lower electron gain enthalpy than chlorine. The lower value is attributed to small size of fluorine. Because of its small size, there is repulsion between the electron pairs already present and the electrons that are added. Hence, electron adding up tendency of F atom is less.
Therefore, Electron gain enthalpy of fluorine is – 333 kJ / mol. is less than that of chlorine (-349 kJ/mol).

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 10.
HF is a liquid while HCl is gas -explain.
Answer:
HF is an associated liquid because of hydrogen bonds.
H – F ……………… H – F ………… H – F
HCl is not an associated liquid. Hence its boiling point is less than that of HF. Hence it is a gas.

Question 11.
Bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 is less than that of Cl2 explain.
Answer:
Due to small size of fluorine atoms, the F – F distance is also small. Hence internuclear repulsion is high. The large repulsions bet-ween lone pair of electrons present on the two fluorine atoms weaken the bond. This repulsion is less in other molecules, because the atoms are large in size.

Question 12.
Write the formulae of the compounds, in which oxygen has positive oxidation states and mention the oxidation states of oxygen in them.
Answer:

CompoundOxidation state of oxygen
oxygen difluoride OF2+2
dioxygen difluoride O2F2+1

Question 13.
What is the use of O2F2 and I2O5?
Answer:
O2F2 oxidises plutonium to PuF6 and the reaction is used in removing plutonium as PuF6 from spent nuclear fuel.
I2O5 is a good oxidising agent and is used in the estimation of carbon monoxide.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 14.
Write two uses of hydrogen chloride.
Answer:

  1. HCl is used for ‘pickling’ metals that is removing oxide layers from the surface.
  2. To make metal chlorides.
  3. In the manufacture of dyestuffs.

Question 15.
Explain the reactions of Cl2 with NaOH.
Answer:

  1. With cold, dilute NaOH, chloride and hypochlorite are formed.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 1
  2. With hot, cone. NaOH, chloride and chlorate are formed.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 2

Question 16.
What happens when Cl2 reacts with dry slaked lime ? [Mar. 2018 AP & TS ; AP 17]
Answer:
Ca(OH)2 + Cl2 → CaOCl2 + H2O
Bleaching powder is formed when chlorine reacts with dry slaked lime.

Question 17.
Chlorine acts as an oxidising agent Explain with two examples. [AP ’16]
Answer:

  1. Chlorine oxidises ferrous sulphate for ferric sulphate.
    2FeSO4 + H2SO4 + Cl2 → Fe2 (SO4)3 + 2HCl
  2. Chlorine oxidises SO2 to SO3 and in presence of water, H2SO4 is formed.
    SO2 + 2H2O + Cl2 → H2SO4 + 2HCl

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 18.
What is aqua-regia? Write its reaction with gold and platinum.
Answer:
When 3 parts cone. HC/ and 1 part cone. HN03 are mixed, aqua regia is formed.
\(\mathrm{Au}+4 \mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{NO}_3^{-}+4 \mathrm{C} t \longrightarrow \mathrm{AuCl}_4^{-}+\mathrm{NO}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)
\(3 \mathrm{Pt}+16 \mathrm{H}^{+}+4 \mathrm{NO}_3^{-}+18 \mathrm{Cl} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{PtCl}_6^{2-}+4 \mathrm{NO}+8 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

Question 19.
How is Cl2 manufactured by Deacon’s [AP & TS Mar. 19; (AP 17; TS 16)]
Answer:
Cl2 is formed when HCl gas is oxidised by atmospheric oxygen in presence of CuCl2 at 723K.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 3

Question 20.
Chlorine acts as a bleaching agent only in the presence of moisture – Explain.
Answer:
Bleaching action of chlorine is due to oxidation. In presence of moisture, chlorine dis-solves in water to give nascent oxygen.
Cl2 + H2O → 2HCl + (O)
Coloured substance + (0) → Colourless substance

Question 21.
The decreasing order of acidic character among hypo halogen acids is HClO > HBrO > HIO. Give reason.
Answer:
The acidic character of HClO is due to its dissociation to give HCl.
HClO → HCl + (O)
Hypobromites and hypoiodides tend to disproportionate.
3BrO → 2Br + BrO3
Hence stability of HBrO and HIO is less. Hence less acidic.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 22.
The acidic nature of oxoacids of chlorine is HOCl < HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4 – Explain. (Hint: HA + H2O ⇌ H3O+ + A conjugate base, greater the stability of A, lesser will be its basic strength or greater will be the tendency of HA to release H+. In other words, stronger will be the acid HA. Among the conjugate bases of oxoacids of chlorine, the stability order is OCl < ClO2 < ClO3 < ClO4)
Answer:
Among the conjugate bases of oxoacids of chlorine, the stability order is
OCl < ClO2 < ClO3 < ClO4
The more the stability of conjugate base, the stronger will be acid. Hence HClO4 is a strong acid as ClO4 is stable. HOCl is weak as OCl is less stable.

Question 23.
What are interhalogen compounds? Give two examples.
Answer:
The binary compounds formed by the combination of halogens among themselves are called interhalogen compounds.
Ex : AX type ; ICl, Cl F
AX3 type ; ClF3, BrF3
AX5 type ; BrF5, IF5

Question 24.
Explain the structure of ClF3.
Answer:
Excited chlorine
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 4
Chlorine undergoes sp3d hybridisation.
It assumes trigonal bipyramidal shape with two lone pairs of electrons. ClF3 is planar, T- shaped with bond angle 90°. Lone pair distorts the angle slightly.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 5

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 25.
OF2 should be called oxygen difluoride and not fluorine oxIde – Why?
(HInt : F Is more electronegative than Oxygen).
Answer:
As fluorine is more electronegative than oxygen, fluorine is in – 1 oxidation state. Hence the compounds of oxygen with fluorine are called fluorides. So, OF2 is to be called oxygen difluoride.

Question 26.
Iodine is more soluble in KI than in water -Explain.
Answer:
Iodine combines with KI in aqueous solution to form KI3.
KI + I2 → KI3
As complex formation increases solubility, solubility of I2 is more in KI.

Question 27.
Among the hydrides of halogens (a) which is most stable? (b) which is most acidic? (c) which has lowest boiling point?
Answer:
a) HF is most stable,
b) HI is most acidic.
c) HCl has lowest boiling point.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 28.
Compare the bleaching action of Cl2 and SO2.
Answer:
Cl2 acts as bleaching agent in presence of moisture. Cl2 bleaches by oxidation.
Cl2 + H2O → HCl + (O)
Coloured substance + (0) → Colourless substance
SO2 bleaches through reduction.
SO2 + 2H2O → H2SO4 + 2H
Coloured matter + 2[H] → Colourless matter

Question 29.
Give the oxidation states of halogens in the following. [TS ’15]
a) Cl2O
b) ClO2
c) KBrO3
d) NaClO4
Answer:
a) Let the oxidation state of Cl be x.
2x – 2 = 0
x = + 1
∴ O.S. of Cl in Cl2O is + 1.

b) ClO2; x – 4 = – 1
x = 4 – 1 = +3
∴ O.S. of Cl in ClO2 is + 3.

c) KBrO3
O.S. of K = + 1; O.S. of O is -2
+1 + x – 6 = 0
x = + 5

d) NaClO4
+1 + x – 8 = 0
x – 7 = 0
x = +7
O.S. of Cl in NaClO4 is +7.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 30.
Describe the molecular shape of I3. (Hint: Central iodine is of SP3d. – linear)
Answer:
Central Iodine atom is in sp3d hybridisation.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 6

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 31.
How can you prepare Cl2 from HCl and HCl from Cl2? Write the reactions.
Answer:

  1. HCl is oxidised by MnO2 to Cl2.
    By heating manganese dioxide with concentrated HCl.
    MnO2 + 4HCl → MnCl2 + Cl2 + 2H2O
  2. Chlorine reacts with H2 to form HCl.
    H2 + Cl2 → 2HCl

Question 32.
Write balanced equations for the following. [IPE ’14]
a) NaCl is heated with cone. H2SO4 in the presence of MnO2
b) Chlorine is passed into a solution of NaI in water.
Answer:
a) Cl2 gas liberated.
4NaCl + MnO2 + 4H2SO4 → MnCl2 + 4NaHSO4 + 2H2O + Cl2
b) I2 is liberated.
2NaI + Cl2 → 2NaCl + I2

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 33.
Explain the structures of
a) BrF5 and
b) IF7.
Answer:
a) BrF5: Central Bromine atom in BrF5 undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation. It has distorted octahedral shape.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 7

b) IF7 : Central Iodine atom in IF7 undergoes sp3d3 hybridisation. It has pentagonal bipyramidal structure.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 8

Question 34.
Write a short note on hydrogen halides.
Answer:
Halogens react with hydrogen forming hydrogen halides.
H2 + X2 → 2HX
Properties:

  1. Stability decreases from HF to HI.
    HF > HCl > HBr > HI
  2. The acidic strength increases in the order HF < HC/ < HBr < HI.
  3. The boiling points HCl < HBr < HI < HF
    HF is associated liquid due to hydrogen bonding
    H – F …………. H – F …………. H – F

Uses:

  1. HF is used in etching of glass.
  2. HCl is used in the manufacture of chlorine, NH4Cl and glucose.
  3. HCl is used for extracting glue from bones and purifying bone black.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 35.
How is chlorine obtained in the laboratory ? How does it react with the following ? [(Mar. 18 AP) (AC & TS 16)]
a) cold dil. NaOH
b) excess NH3
c) KI
Answer:
By heating concentrated hydrochloric acid with Manganese dioxide.
MnO2 + 4HCl → MnCl2 + Cl2 + 2H2O
Reactions:
a) When chlorine is passed through cold dil. NaOH, chloride and hypochlorite are formed.
2NaOH + Cl2 → NaCl + NaOCl + H2O

b) Chlorine gives nitrogen and ammonium . chloride with excess ammonia.
8NH3 + 3Cl2 → 6NH4Cl + N2

c) When Cl2 gas is passed through KI, I2 is liberated.
2KI + Cl2 → 2KCl + I2

Question 36 .
What are interhalogen compounds? Give some examples to illustrate the definition. How are they classified?
Answer:
When two different halogens react with each other, interhalogen compounds are formed.
They are classified as AX, AX3, AX5 and AX7 where A is halogen of larger size and X is smaller size.
They are prepared by direct combination or by the action of halogen on lower inter-halogen compounds.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 9
Example:
AX Type : ClF, BrF, ICl
AX3Type : ClF3, BrF3, ICl3
AX5 Type : BrF5, IF5
AX7 Type: IF7

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 37.
How is ClF3 prepared? How does it react with water? Explain its structure.
Answer:
ClF3 is prepared by the reaction of Cl2 with excess of Fluorine.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 10
ClF3 is a colourless gas. It has bent T-shape structure.

Reaction with water :
Chloric acid is formed when ClF3 undergoes hydrolysis.
ClF3 + 2H2O → 3HF + HClO2
Structure:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 11
Excited state of chlorine
Chlorine undergoes sp3d hybridisation. There are two lone pairs and three bond pairs.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 12
ClF3 is T – shaped. The bond pairs and lone pairs occupy corners of trigonal bipyramid. The two lone pairs occupy the equatorial positions to minimise the repulsions.

Question 38.
How is chlorine prepared in the laboratory ? How does it react with the following ? [TS ’15]
a) Iron
b) hot cone. NaOH
c) acidified FeSO4
d) Iodine
e) H2S
f) Na2S2O3
Answer:
Chlorine is prepared in the laboratory by heating concentrated Hydrochloric acid with Manganese dioxide.
MnO2 + 4HCl → MnCl2 + Cl2 + 2H2O
It can also be prepared by heating a mixture of sodium chloride and concentrated H2SO4.
4NaCl + MnO2 + 4H2SO4 → MnCl2 + 4NaHSO4 + 2H2O + Cl2
Reactions:
a) It oxidises Fe to Fe3+.
2Fe + 3Cl2 → 2FeCl3

b) When Cl2 is passed through hot cone. NaOH sodium chlorate is formed.
6NaOH + 3Cl2 → 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2O

c) It oxidises acidified ferrous sulphate to ferric sulphate.
2FeSO4 + H2SO4 + Cl2 → Fe2(SO4)3 + 2HCl

d) With I2 in presence of water, it forms iodic acid.
I2 + 6H2O + 5Cl2 → 2HIO3+ 10HCl

e) It reacts with H2S to form HCl.
H2S + Cl2 → 2HCl + S ↓

f) Hypo reacts with Cl2 to form HCl and precipitates sulphur.
Na2S2O3 + Cl2 + H2O → Na2SO4 + 2HCl + S ↓

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 39.
Discuss anomalous behaviour of fluorine.
Answer:
Fluorine, the first element of halogen group shows anomalous properties.

  1. Its high reactivity is due to small bond dissociation enthalpy of F – F bond and high electronegativity.
  2. The electronegativity, ionisation enthalpy and electrode potentials are higher them expected.
  3. Bond dissociation and electron gain enthalpy are quite lower than expected.
  4. The anomalous behaviour of fluorine is due to its small size, highest electronega-tivity, low F- F bond dissociation enthalpy and non-availability of d-oribtals in the valence shell.
  5. HF is a liquid while other hydrogen halides are gases.
  6. Most of the reactions of fluorine are exothermic.
  7. AgCl is insoluble in water whereas AgF is soluble.
  8. CaCl2 is soluble whereas CaF2 insoluble.

Question 40.
How is chlorine prepared by electrolytic method? How does it react with a) NaOH and b) NH3 under different conditions. [AP ’16, ’15]
Answer:
Chlorine is obtained by the electrolysis of brine solution. Chlorine is liberated at anode.

Brine solution is taken in a perforated U-shaped steel vessel. Graphite rod acts as anode, steel vessel acts as cathode. H2 and NaOH are by products.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 13
NaCl → Na+ + Cl
At Anode : 2Cl – 2e → Cl2
2H2O + 2e → 2OH + H2
Na+ + OH → NaOH
Reactions:

  1. When chlorine gas is passed through cold, dil. NaOH, NaCl and NaOCl are formed.
    2NaOH + Cl2 → NaCl + NaOCl + H2O
  2. When Cl2 gas is passed through hot concentrated NaOH, sodium chloride and sodium chlorate are formed.
    6NaOH + 3Cl2 → 5NaCl + NaClO3+ 3H2O

b) With excess ammonia, Nitrogen gas is evolved.
8NH3 + 3Cl2 → 6NH4Cl + N2
When chlorine is in excess, NCl3 and HCl are formed.
NH3 + 3Cl2 → NCl3 + 3HCl

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 41.
Write the names and formulae of oxoacids of chlorine. Explain their structures and acidic relative nature.
Answer:
Hypochlorous acid HOCl
Chlorous acid HClO2
Chloric acid HClO3
Perchloric acid HClO4
Acidic character : Among the different oxoacids of chlorine, the acidic character follows the order.
HOCl < HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4
When these acids, dissolve in water their conjugate bases OCl, ClO2, ClO3 and ClO4 are formed. As the oxidation of chlorine increases, number of n bonds increase and delocalisation increases. As delocalisation of n electrons increases, stability of conjugate base increases. Hence the ability of anion to accept proton decreases. Hence the basic character of anions increases in the order.
ClO4 < ClO3– < ClO2 < ClO
ClO is strong base, its conjugate acid HOCl is weak.
ClO4 is weak base, its conjugate acid HClO4 is strong.
Hence the acidic character increases and the order is
HOCl < HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4.

Structures: In all these acids, chlorine uses sp3 hybrid orbitals.
1) HOCl: It has linear shape no dπ – pπ bonds with three line pair of electrons.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 14

2) HClO2 : The anion of the acid is ClO2. It has a V shape. There are two lone pairs in chlorine. The electron in 3d orbitals forms a π bond with oxygen.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 15
HClO3 : ClO3 is pyramidal. Two unpaired electrons in 3d form two dπ – pπ bonds with oxygen. There is one lone pair.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 16
HClO4 : Perchlorate ion has tetrahedral shape. Three dπ – pπ bonds are formed.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 17
As there is more delocalisation the stability of ions increases in the order.
ClO< ClO2 < ClO3 < ClO4

Intext Questions – Answers

Question 1.
Considering the parameters such as bond dissociation enthalpy, electron gain enthalpy and hydration enthalpy, compare the oxidising power of F2 and cl2.
Answer:
Because of low enthalpy of dissociation of F – F bond and high hydration enthalpy, F2 acts as strong oxidising agent than chlorine.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 2.
Give two examples to show the anoma¬lous behaviour of Flurine.
Answer:
HF is a liquid while others (HCl, HBr, Hr) are 4. gases. AgCl is insoluble in water whereas AgF is soluble.

Question 3.
Sea is the greatest source of some Halogens. Comment.
Answer:
Sea water contains chlorides, bromides and Iodides of sodium, potassium, magnesium and calcium. The deposits of dried up seas contain sodium chloride and carnalite. Certain forms of marine life and various seaweeds contain Iodine. Hence we can say that sea is the greatest source of some Halogens.

Question 4.
Give the reason for the bleaching action of Cl2.
Answer:
Chlorine bleaches by oxidation. Coloured substance + (0) → Colourless substance

Question 5.
Name two poisonous gases which can be prepared from chlorine gas.
Answer:
Phosgene, Tear gas, Mustard gas.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 6.
Why is ICl more reactive than I2?
The ICl bond is weaker than I – I bond.

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material 3rd Lesson Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material 3rd Lesson Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the meaning of Non-profit organisation.
Answer:
The organisations, whose main object is not to earn profit, but to render service to their members called as a non-profit organisation. Eg: Education Institutions, Hospitals clubs Religious Institutions, Co-operation societies.

Question 2.
Write the characteristics of Not-for-profit organisation.
Answer:

  1. Not-for-profit organisations are to serve its members and the society in general.
  2. These organisations will come into existence to promote Arts, Science, Religion and Spirituality.
  3. These organisations do not declare and pay any dividend to its members.
  4. These organisations are managed by elected members.

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation
Question 3.
What is the differences between Capital expenditure and Revenue expenditure?
Answer:

Capital expenditureRevenue expenditure
1. This expenditure is incurred to acquire the assets or to improve the earning capacity or maintaining the life of the existing asset.1. This expenditure incurred to meet the day-to-day expenses of the organisation.
2. It is non recurring in nature.2. It is recurring in nature.
3. The benefits of this expenditure are available for a longer period.3. The benefits of this expenditure are for accounting period.
4. This expenditure will be shown in the Balance sheet.4. This expenditure will be shown in the Income and Expenditure account.
5. It is a real account in nature.5. It is a nominal account in nature.

Question 4.
What are the differences between Capital receipts and Revenue receipts?
Answer:

Capital receiptsRevenue receipts
1.   These are obtained from sale of assets concern.
2.    It is nonrecurring in nature.
3.    These are in Huge or large amount.
4.    Capital receipts are shown on the liabilities side of the Balance sheet or deducted from the concerned asset on the assets side of the Balance sheet.
1.    It is obtained from regular activities of the concern.
2.     It is recurring in nature.
3.    These are in small amount.
4.     Revenue receipts are credited to Trading and Profit and Loss account or Income and Expenditure account.

Question 5.
What is Deferred Revenue Expenditure?
Answer:

  1. When heavy or unusual expenditure of revenue in nature is incurred in a particular year and the benefit of which extends beyond that year, it is treated as “Deferred Revenue Expenditure.
  2. In other words the expenditure is revenue in nature, but its benefit is spread over a number of years.
  3. For example Preliminary expenses, heavy expenditure on the advertisement.

Question 6.
Explain the differences between Payment and Expenditure.
Answer:

  1. Expenditure includes all expenses incurred during particular period, it may be either paid or to be paid. Payment means actual cash paid. It may be for the current year or for a past period or for a future period.
  2. Payment may be an expenditure, but an expenditure need not necessarily be a payment.

Question 7.
Explain the differences between Receipt and Income.
Answer:
1. Receipt means actual cash received. It may be for the current year or for a past period or for a future period. Whereas an income relates to a specific period, it may be accrued or earned during that period; it may be either received or receivable.

2. Receipt is different from income. An income may be receipt, but a receipt need not necessarily be an income.

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Question 8.
Explain the following terms.
Answer:
1) Donations :

  1. Any amount received by the organizations from the individuals and institutions voluntarily is called “Donations”.
  2. Donations are divided into two types :
    A) General Donations. B) Specific Donations

2) Legacy :

  1. Amount received by the organization as per the “will” of a person is called legacy. It is non-recurring nature and to be treated as capital income.
  2. Accounting treatments: Legacy is treated as capital income and recorded on the liabilities side of the Balance sheet.

3) Entrance Free:

  1. The amount/Fee, paid by the new members at the time of joining the organisations is known as Entrance fees.
  2. It is treated as revenue income and it should be credited to income and expenditure account.

4) Subscriptions: It is an amount paid by the members regularly at periodical intervals. Subscriptions are regular source of income for the organization.

5) Capital fund : Excess of assets over liabilities is called capital fund. It is general fund which is similar to capital account of profit-making organisations.
Capital fund = Assets – Liabilities

6) Specific funds: Specific fund received for specific purposes such as building fund or tournament fund, prize fund etc.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Write the features of receipts and payment Account.
Answer:

  1. Receipts and Payment account is a real account that records all cash receipts and Payments.
  2. It is a summary of cash and bank transactions.

Features :

  1. Receipts and payments account is similar to cash book.
  2. It is a real account.
  3. This account reveals opening and closing balances of cash and bank.
  4. It is maintained and cash basis of accounting.
  5. Credit transactions are not recorded in receipts and payments account.
  6. All cash receipts are shown on debit side, all cash payments are shown on credit side of the account.
  7. This account depicts closing balance of cash and bank at the end of the year.

Question 2.
What is an Income and Expenditure account? Explain its features.
Answer:

  1. The income and Expenditure account is similar to Profit and Loss account.
  2. On debit side Revenue expenditure and on the credit side revenue income are recorded to ascertain the financial result of the organization.

Features :

  1. It is similar to profit and loss account.
  2. It is a nominal account.
  3. All revenue expenses are recorded on the debit side and all revenue incomes on the credit side of the income and expenditure account.
  4. Only revenue items are taken into consideration. Capital items are to be totally excluded.
  5. There is no closing balance, but the difference between two sides of account shows either surplus or deficit.
  6. It also records non-cash items like depreciation.
  7. The surplus/deficit is transferred to capital fund in the balance sheet.

Question 3.
Explain the difference between Receipts and Payments account and Income and Expenditure account.
Answer:

Basic of DifferenceReceipts and payments accountIncome and expenditure account
1) Type of accountIt is real account.It is nominal account.
2) Debit and credit sideReceipts are shown on the debit side and payments on the credit side.Income is shown on the credit side and expenditure on the debit side.
3) Basic structureIt is a summary of cash and bank transactions.It is a summary or income earned and expenditure incurred during the year.
4) Opening balanceOpening balance which represents cash in hand or at a bank.There is no opening balance.
5) ObjectIt is prepared to present a summary of cash transactions for a given period.It is prepared to ascertain the net results of all revenue transactions for a given period.
6) Closing balanceClosing balance shows cash in hand or at bank.Closing balance shows either surplus of deficit.
7) ContentsBoth revenue and capital items are considered.Only revenue items are considered.
8) Accrued itemsIt does not included accrued items, i.e., accrued incomes and expenses.It includes accrued incomes and expenses.
9)AdjustmentsNo adjustments are required.All adjustments relating to current year income and expen­diture are taken into conside­ration.

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Question 4.
What is donation? Explain the types of donations.
Answer:
Donations are the amount received by organizations from individuals and institutions as a gift.
Donations are two types :
a) General donations
b) Special donations (or) specific donations.

a) General donations: General donations is the amount given by the individuals without mentioning the purpose. So that the amount can be utilised for any purpose by the not-for- profit organizations.

b) Special donations (or) specific donations: A donation received by the organization for a specific purpose is called specific donations. For example: Donation for buildings.

Question 5.
Bring out the difference between Capital and Revenue items by giving suitable examples.
Answer:
I. Capital Items :
1) Capital Expenditure: Capital expenditure is the expenditure which incurred for the acquisition assets for the expenditure incurred to increase the earning capacity of the existing assets.
For Example Purchases of assets like buildings, machinery, furniture, investments, books, installation of assets etc.

2) Capital Receipts: Capital receipts of business consist of capital contributed by the members, special donations and sale of fixed assets.
Capital receipts is non-recurring nature.
For Example Legacies, Government grants, Life membership fees.

II. Revenue Items:
1) Revenue Expenses: These expenses are incurred in the day-to-day operations of the organizations. For Eg. Salaries, wages, transport, rent paid, postage, printing and stationery, newspapers, interest paid etc. and also includes expenditure on maintenance of fixed assets such as repairs, depreciations etc.

2) Revenue Receipts: These receipts are generally obtained from the day-to-day operations of the organizations. Eg: Subscriptions, rent received, interest received, proceeds from entertainment, lectures etc.

Textual Problems

Question 1.
From the following details, prepare Receipts and Payments account.
Opening balance of cash — 1,500
Opening bank balance — 4,500
Subscriptions collected — 8,000
Entertainment show receipts — 4,000
Entrance fees received — 2,000
Computer purchased — 3,000
Tournament expenses — 3,000
Entertainment show expenses — 1,800
Opening balance of cash — 1,500
Opening bank balance — 4,500
Subscriptions collected — 8,000
Entertainment show receipts — 4,000
Entrance fees received — 2,000
Computer purchased — 3,000
Tournament expenses 3,000
Entertainment show expenses 1,800
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 1

Question 2.
From the following details, prepare the Receipts and Payments account of the Officers club for the year ending 31st March 2020.

Opening cash in hand — 1,400
Opening cash at bank — 3,400
Subscriptions received — 25,000
Donations collected — 7,000
Honorarium paid — 6,000
Rent paid — 3,000
Tournament expenses — 1,000
Shares purchased — 5,000
Entrance fee received — 2,600
Paid for internet connection — 1,500
Electricity charges — 500
Repairs and maintenance — 400
Stationery — 500
Postage — 1,000
Dinner expenses — 1,500
Cash in hand at the end — 4,000
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 2

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Question 3.
Prepare Receipts and Payments account of Sandeepani Educational society’ for the year ended 31-3-2020.
Balance of cash — 2,500
Bank balance — 3,000
Subscriptions received for 2018-19 — 4,000
Subscriptions received for 20 19-20 — 5,000
Donations received — 2,000
Salaries paid — 1,000
Life membership fees received — 3,000
Rent paid in advance — 1,500
Honorarium paid — 2,500
Govt. Securities purchased — 2,000
Rent paid for 2018-19 — 500
Rent paid for 20 19-20 — 2,500
Building fund received — 4,000
Tournament expenses — 800
Postage and stationery — 500
Purchase of books — 4,500
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 3

Question 4.
Kamareddy Youth Club gives you their receipts and payments account and other information and requests you to prepare their income and expenditure account for the year ended 31-3-2019.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 4
Additional Information :

  1. Outstanding subscriptions on 31-3-2019 Rs. 1,500.
  2. Subscriptions received in advance on 31-03-2019 Rs. 500.
  3. Value of old furniture sold is Rs. 45,000.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 5

Question 5.
Following is the Receipts and Payments Account of a “Manasvi Library” for the year ended 31st March, 2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 6
Additional Information :

  1. The subscription amount includes Rs. 500 for the previous year and outstanding subscriptions for the current year are Rs. 1,500.
  2. Subscription received in advance Rs. 500.
  3. Capitalize half of the entrance fee.
  4. Books are to be depreciated at 5% per annum.

You are required to prepare income and expenditure account.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 7

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Question 6.
From the following receipts and payments account, prepare income and expenditure account of a Sports Club’, Karimnagar.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 8
Additional Information :

  1. Capitalize 50% of the donations, legacies, entrance fee and life membership fee.
  2. Subscriptions still outstanding amount to Rs. 5,000.
  3. Depreciate sports material and Furniture 10%.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 9

Question 7.
From the following receipts and payments account of Sri Kala Nilayam, Nirmal for the year ended 31-03-2019, prepare income and expenditure account.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 10
Additional Information:

  1. Outstanding salaries Rs. 500.
  2. Subscriptions outstanding for 2018-19 Rs. 1,000.
  3. Depreciate furniture by 10%.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 11

Question 8.
From the following receipts and payments account and other details of “Laharika Charitable Trust”. Prepare Income and Expenditure account for the year ended 31-03-2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 12
Additional Information :

  1. Subscriptions received in advance Rs. 1,500.
  2. Outstanding rent Rs. 450.
  3. The value of investments Rs. 40,000 and rate of interest is 3%.
  4. Donations are received for a prizes to be awarded by the trust.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 13
Working Note :
Total Interest on Investment = 40,000 x 3/100 = 12,000
We already received = 1000
The remaining receivable interest on investment is 200

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Question 9.
From the following information, prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 31-03-2020 of Kamareddy Cricket Club’.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 14
Additional Information :

  1. Subscriptions received included amount Rs. 2,200 related to the previous year.
  2. Outstanding subscription Rs. 1,000.
  3. Provide Rs. 300 depreciation on ground moving machine.
  4. Sports material opening balance Rs. 4,000 and closing balance Rs. 7,500.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 15

Question 10.
The following is the receipts and payments account for the year ended 31st March, 2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 16
Additional Information :

  1. The subscription received amount includes Rs. 1,000 for the year 2020-2021.
  2. Outstanding rent Rs. 600 and printing Rs. 300.
  3. The value of investments Rs. 60,000 and rate of interest 8%.

You are required to prepare income and expenditure account.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 17
Working Note :
Total Interest on Investment = 60,000 x 8/100 = 4,800
We already received Interest = 4,000
Remaining interest receivable = 800.

Question 11.
Prepare income and expenditure account and balance sheet from the following Receipts and Payments account of “Supreetha” nursing home for the year ended 31-03-2019.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 18
Additional Information :

  1. Nursing home had investment value of Rs. 8,000 and Capital fund of the nursing home was Rs. 30,000.
  2. Medicine opening balance as on 01.04.2018 is Rs. 2,000. Closing balance as on 31.03.2019 is Rs. 1,500.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 19
Balance Sheet of Supreetha Nursing home as on 31-3-2019
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 20

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation
Question 12.
The following is the Receipts and Payments account of “Ashok Nagar Welfare Association’ for the year ended 31st December 2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 21
Additional Information :

  1. Capital fund of the association is Rs. 7,000.
  2. Hall rent Rs. 1,000 related to last year and Rs. 600 received in advance.
  3. Outstanding subscriptions for current year Rs. 3,600.

Prepare Income and expenditure account and Balance sheet from the above information.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 22
Balance Sheet of Ashok Nagar Welfare Association as on 31-12-2020
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 23

Question 13.
The ‘Sree Vedha Literary Society’ gives you the following Receipts and Payments account for the ended 31-03-2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 24
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 25
Additional Information :

  1. Outstanding subscriptions for current year Rs. 1,500.
  2. Subscriptions received in advance Rs. 1,000.
  3. Value of books on 31-03-2020 Rs. 1,800.
  4. The furniture was purchased on 1.10.2019 and is to be depreciated by 20%.
  5. Society had the inverter values of Rs. 3,200 and the capital fund of society Rs. 8,000.
  6. Entrance Fee not to be capitalised.

Prepare Income and Expenditure account and Balance sheet from above information.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 26
Balance Sheet of Sree Vedha literary society as on 31-3-2020
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 27
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 28

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Question 14.
From the following receipts and payments account and additional information prepare income and expenditure account and balance sheet of “Sreenidhi Library” as on 31.3.2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 29
Additional Information :

  1. Subscriptions outstanding Rs. 1,500.
  2. Salaries outstanding Rs. 600.
  3. Library had Bank Deposits Rs. 12,000 and Books Rs. 5,000 and Capital fund Rs. 41,000.
  4. Provide Depreciation Books @ 10% p.a including purchase made during the year.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 30
Balance Sheet of Sreenidhi Library as on 31-3-2020
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 31

Question 15.
Sree Hanman Gym, Hyderabad gives you the following Receipts and Payments account for the ended 31-03-2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 32
Additional Information :

  1. Subscriptions received included Rs. 1,000 for the previous year.
  2. Subscriptions outstanding for the current year Rs. 1,500.
  3. Outstanding salaries t 1,000.
  4. Half of the Entrance fee has to be capitalised.
  5. Gym has investments worth 120,000 and total Capital fund of the Gym is Rs. 24,000. Prepare Income and Expenditure account and Balance sheet from the above information.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 33
Balance Sheet of Hanman Gym, Hyderabad as on 31-3-2015
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 34

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Textual Examples

Question 1.
From the following information prepare the receipts and payments account of Hyderabad Cricket Club, for the year ending 31-03-2020.

As on 01-04-2014Bank balance6,000
Cash balance4,000
As on 31-03-2020Subscriptions20,000
Entrance fees5,000
Salaries8,650
Rent paid4,500
Furniture purchased9,200.
Cricket bats and balls5,300
Sale of old cricket bats1,200
Life membership fee7,500
Electricity charges2,800
Postage1,750
Wages2,000
Printing and stationeiy2,800
Tournament fund7,500
Tournament expenditure8,500

Answer:
Receipt and Payments a/c of Hyderabad Cricket Club
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 35

Question 2.
From the following information prepare the receipts and payments account of “Nirmal Sports club for the year ended 31st March 2020.

Bank overdraft (As on 01-04-2019)2,000
Cash Balance (As on 01-04-2019)12,500
Subscription received for the year 2019-202014,000
Subscription received for the year 2018-20192,000
Subscription received for the year 2020-20213,000
Donations5,400
Locker’s rent1,200
8% Investments purchased5,000
Sale of grass700
Salaries and Wages7,500
Rent & Taxes3,200
Office expenses550
Entrance fee2,400
Interest of Deposits800
Printing and Stationery450
Tournament expenditure1,000
Purchase of sports material1,200
Furniture purchased6,500
Closing of Bank balance4,800

Answer:
Receipt and payments A/c of Nirmal Sports Club
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 36

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Question 3.
From the following particulars prepare the receipts and payments account year 31 March 2019.
Cash in hand ( 01-04-2019) — 2,000
Cash at bank (01-4-2019) — 28,000
Investments purchased — 4,000
Subscriptions received — 1,08,000
(including Rs. 5,000, Next financial year)
Subscriptions outstanding (for Last year) — 10,000
Furniture purchased — 6,000
Interest received on investments — 4,300
Books purchased — 9,000
Rent paid — 6,000
Rent due on 31-03-2019 — 400
Entrance fee — 2,700
Salaries paid — 20,000
Outstanding salaries — 3,000
Cash in Hand — 20,000
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 37

Question 4.
From the following information prepare the income and expenditure account
Subscriptions received — 54,000
(including last year subscriptions Rs. 4,000)
Outstanding subscriptions — 20,000
Salaries (including last year salaries Rs. 2,400) — 17,200
Outstanding salaries — 3,200
Sundry expenses — 4,000
Tournament expenditure — 8,000
Meeting expenditure — 6,000
Traveling expenses — 6,400
Books purchased — 18,000
Newspapers — 4,000
Rent — 9,000
Postage and Telephone etc. — 3,600
Printing and Stationery — 4,400
Donations — 6,000
Sale of old newspaper — 400
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 38
Note :

  1. The purchase of books is capital expenditure and hence not considered in income and expenditure account.
  2. Small amount of donations treated as a revenue income and taken as income on the credit side of income and expenditure account.

Question 5.
From the following receipts and payments account prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 31st March 2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 39
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 40
Other Information :

  1. Outstanding subscriptions for the year 2019-20 Rs. 2,500.
  2. Prepaid Rent Rs. 1,300.
  3. Outstanding Stationery bill Rs. 300.
  4. Cost of Investments Rs. 10,000. Interest rate 10%
  5. Capitalize the donations.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 41
Working Notes :
1) Purchase of furniture, Govt. Bonds are capital expenditures these are to be recorded in balance sheet as assets.

2) Current year 2019-20 subscriptions has to be treated as a revenue income.

3) Loss on sale of furniture :
Book value of furniture sold Rs. 2,000
Less: Sale value Rs. 1,650
Loss on sale of furniture Rs. 350
Loss on sale of furniture is revenue expenditure. It is shown in income and expenditure account debit side.

4) Outstanding interest on investments
Interest on Investments for the year = 10,000 x 10/100 = Rs. 1,000
Interest on Investment = Rs. 1,000
Less: Interest received = 800
Less: Outstanding interest on investments 200
Outstanding interest on Investments Rs. 200/- to be added to interest received credit side of income expenditure account.

5) Membership fees and entrance fees are small amounts treated as revenue incomes shown in credit side of income and expenditure account.

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Question 6.
From the following receipts and payments account prepare the income and expenditure account of Kama Reddy Cricket Club for the year ending 31-03-2019.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 42
Adjustments :

  1. Capitalize the entrance fee and donations.
  2. Closing stock sports material on 31-3-2019 t 5,000.
  3. Outstanding subscriptions Rs. 2,135 for the year 2018-19.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 43
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 44
Working Notes :
1) Purchase of furniture Govt. Bonds are capital expenditure. These are to be recorded in the balance sheet as assets.

2) Calculation of depreciation on sports material :
Sports material purchased = Rs. 7,500
Less: Closing stock of sports material = Rs. 5,000
Depreciation on sports material = 2,500
It is shown in income and expenditure account debit side

3) Calculation of Interest on Investments:
Interest on Investments for the year = 12,000
Interest on Investments = Rs. 1,200
Less : Interest on Investments received = 900
Outstanding interest on Investments 300
It will be added credit side of income and expenditure a/c to interest on investments.

4) Profit on sale of old furniture:
Old furniture sale value = 1,685
Less: Old furniture book value = 1,500
Profit on sale old furniture = 185
Profit on sale of old furniture is treated as a revenue income. It is shown on credit side of income and expenditure account.

Question 7.
From the following receipts and payments account prepare the income and expenditure account and the balance sheet of Prime Sports Club, Hyderabad.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 45

  1. Capitalise the 50% of donations and life membership fee.
  2. Outstanding subscriptions Rs. 5,000.
  3. Provide for depreciation on furniture and buildings 5% and on sports material 10%.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 46
Working Notes :
Calculation of depreciation :
a) Building 5% = Rs. 40,000 x 5/100 = Rs. 2,000
b) Furniture 5% = Rs. 10,000 x 5/100 = Rs. 500
c) Sports material 10% = Rs. 5,000 x 10/100 = Rs. 500
Capitalisation of 50% of donations = Rs. 50,000 x 50/100 = Rs. 25,000
Capitalisation of 50% of life membership fee = Rs. 3,000 x 50/100 = Rs. 1,500

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Balance Sheet of Prime Sports Club, Hyderabad
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 47

Question 8.
From the following receipts and payments account of Indoor Sports club and the sub joined information prepare income and expenditure account for the year ended 31 March, 2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 48
Other Information :

  1. The club has 50 members each paying an annual subscription of Rs. 500, subscriptions outstanding for the year 2018-19 were Rs. 2,500.
  2. For the year 2019-20, salaries outstanding amounted Rs. 1,000, the salaries paid during current year include Rs. 3,000 for last year.
  3. On 01-04-2019, the club owned building valued Rs. 1,00,000, Furniture Rs. 10,000. Books Rs. 10,000, capital fund Rs. 1,33,000.
  4. Buildings are to be depreciated @ 10%.

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 49
Indoor Sports Club Balance Sheet as on 31-03-2020
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 50

Question 9.
Prepare the income and expenditure account and balance sheet of Hyderabad Cricket Club from the following receipts and payments account for the year ended 31-03-2019.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 51

Subscriptions due on 31-03-2018 — Rs. 3,200
Subscriptions due on 31-03-2019 — Rs. 3,800
Subscriptions received in Advance — Rs. 800
Salaries include Rs. 700 for the year 2017-18
Outstanding for the year 2018-19 — Rs. 900
Sports material on 31-3-2018 — Rs. 3,200
Sports material on 31-3-2019 — Rs. 3,600
Capital fund on 31-3-2018 — Rs. 24,300
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 52
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 53
Balance Sheet of Hyderabad Cricket Club as on 31st March, 2019
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 54

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Question 10.
Receipts and payments of the Railway Recreation Club for the year ended 31st March, 2020.
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 55
Additional Information :

  1. Subscriptions outstanding for the 2019-20 Rs. 2,500.
  2. Value of sports equipment on 01-04-2019 Rs. 1,000 and on 31-03-2020 Rs. 9,000.
  3. Provide Rs. 1,000 depreciation on furniture.
  4. Closing balance of postal stamps Rs. 200.
  5. Capitalise half of the entrance fee
  6. Capital fund on 01-04-2019 Rs. 5,000.

Prepare the Income and Expenditure account and Balance sheet of the club as on 31-03-2020.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 56
Railway Recreation Club Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 2020
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 57

TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation

Working Notes :

1. Calculation of Sports equipment used : (Depreciation)
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 58

2. Calculation of postal stamps used :
TS Inter 2nd Year Accountancy Study Material Chapter 3 Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organisation 59

3. Donations received treated as capital income.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(b) Group-16 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Why is dioxygen a gas but sulphur a solid?
Answer:
Due to small size and high electronegativity oxygen forms multiple bond (=) and exists as O2 molecule. These O2 molecules are held together by weak van der Waals forces. Hence oxygen exists as gas.

Due to large size and less electronegativity Sulphur forms strong S – S bonds and exists as S8 molecule. Hence Sulphur exists as solid.

Question 2.
What happens when
a) KClO3 is heated with MnO2,
b) O2 is passed through KI solution.
Answer:
a) Oxygen is evolved.
2KClO3 → 2KCl + 3O2

b) Iodide is oxidised to I2.
2KI + H2O + O3 → 2K0H + I2 + O2

Question 3.
Give two examples each for amphoteric oxides and neutral oxides.
Answer:
Examples of amphoteric oxides are Al2O3 and ZnO. Examples of neutral oxides are CO, NO and N2O.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 4.
Oxygen generally exhibits an oxidation state of – 2 only while the other members of the group show oxidation states of +2, + 4 and + 6 also – Explain.
Answer:
The multiple oxidation states in the case of elements other than oxygen are due to the availability of d-orbitals in the valence shell of the atoms.

Oxygen exhibits -2 oxidation state only generally except with F, where it shows + I in F2O2 and + II in F2O.

Question 5.
Write any two compounds in which oxygen shows an oxidation state different from -2. Give the oxidation states of oxygen in them.
Answer:

  1. In peroxides oxidation state of oxygen is – 1. Ex: H2O2
  2. In super oxides oxidation state of oxygen is -1/2. Ex : KO2
  3. In F2O, oxidation state of oxygen is + 2.
  4. In F2O2, oxidation state of oxygen is + 1.

Question 6.
Oxygen molecule has the formula O2 while sulphur has S8 – explain.
Answer:
Due to small atomic size and high electro-negativity in oxygen molecule, each oxygen atom is linked to other oxygen atom by a double bond. Hence its formula is O2.
\(: \ddot{\mathrm{O}}=\ddot{\mathrm{O}}:\)
Due to large atomic size and less electro-negativity in sulphur molecule, eight ‘S’ atoms are linked together by single covalent bonds forming.
Puckered S8 rings with crown configuration. Hence formula of sulphur is S8.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 1

Question 7.
Why is H2O a liquid while H2S is a gas? [IPE ’14]
Answer:
The O-H bond in H2O is highly polar. There are hydrogen bonds among the molecules of H2O. Hence it is present as a liquid.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 2
There are no hydrogen bonds among H2S molecules. So it exists as a gas at room temperature.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 8.
H2O is neutral while H2S is acidic-explain.
Answer:
Bond dissociation enthalpy of H-S bond is less than H – O bond. Hence H2S is acidic.

Question 9.
Name the most abundant element present in earth’s crust.
Answer:
Oxygen

Question 10.
Which element of group-16 shows highest catenation?
Answer:
Sulphur

Question 11.
Among the hydrides of chalcogens, which is most acidic and which is most stable?
Answer:

  1. Most acidic hydride of chalcogens is H2Te.
  2. Most stable hydride of chalcogens is H2O.

Question 12.
Give the hybridisation of sulphur in the following.
a) SO2
b) SO3
c) SF4
d) SF6
Answer:
Hybridisation of S in SO2 is sp2.
Hybridisation of S in SO3 is sp2.
Hybridisation of S in SF4 is sp3d.
Hybridisation of S in SF2 is sp3d2.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 13.
Write the names and formulae of any two oxyacids of sulphur. Indicate the oxidation state of sulphur in them.
Answer:

  1. Sulphurous acid = H2SO3
    Oxidation state of sulphur is + 4.
  2. Sulphuric acid = H2SO4
    Oxidation state of sulphur is + 6.
  3. Pyrosulphuric acid = H2S2O7
    Oxidation state of sulphur is + 6.

Question 14.
Explain the structures of SF4 and SF6.
Answer:
Structure of SF4 :
Excited state configuration of S is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 3
Hybridisation of Sulphur is sp3d.
SF4 has distorted trigonal bipyramidal structure with one orbital being occupied by a lone pair of electrons.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 4

Structure of SF6:
Excited state configuration of Sulphur is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 5
SF6 has octahedral symmetry.

Question 15.
Give one example each for
a) a neutral oxide
b) a peroxide
c) a super oxide
Answer:
a) Nitric oxide NO is a neutral oxide.
b) Na2O2 is a peroxide. Peroxides contain O – O bond.
c) KO2 is potassium super oxide.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 16.
What is tailing of mercury? How is it removed ? [AP & TS ’15]
Answer:
Ozone reacts with mercury to form Hg2O. Due to dissolution of Hg2O in Hg mercury loses its meniscus and sticks to the sides of glass. This is called tailing of mercury.
The menisus can be regained by shaking with water which dissolves Hg2O.

Question 17.
Write the principle involved in the quantitative estimation of ozone gas.
Answer:
Ozone liberates I2 from KI solution which can be titrated against a standard solution of Hypo using starch as an indicator.
2KI + H2O + O3 → 2KOH + I2 + O2
2Na2S2O3 + I2→ Na2S4O6 + 2NaI

Question 18.
Write the structure of Ozone.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 6
O-O bond lengths in ozone are identical (128pm) and molecule is angular with a bond angle of 117°.

Question 19.
SO2 can be used as anti-chlor. Explain.
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide reacts with chlorine in presence of charcoal to give sulphuryl chloride.
SO2(g) + Cl2 (g) → SO2Cl2 (l)
So it can remove chlorine and can be used as anti-chlor.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 20.
How is ozone detected?
Answer:

  1. Ozone turns startch iodide paper blue.
  2. It tails mercury.

Question 21.
How does ozone react with ethylene? [Mar. 18 – A.P.]
Answer:
When ozone is bubbled through the solution of ethylene in an inert solvent like CCl4, at 195K, ethylene ozonide is formed.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 7
NO + O3 → NO2 + O2

Question 22.
Out of O2 and O3, which is paramagnetic?
Answer:
O2 is paramagnetic. It contains two unpaired electrons in its molecular form O2.

Question 23.
Between O3 and O2, ozone is a better oxidising agent – why?
Answer:
Due to the ease with which it liberates atoms of nascent oxygen O3 → O2 + (O). Ozone acts as a powerful oxidising agent.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 24.
Write any two uses each for O3 and H3SO4.
Answer:
Uses of Ozone :

  1. It is used as a germicide, disinfectant, and for sterilising water.
  2. It is used for bleaching oils, ivory, flour, starch, etc.

Uses of H2SO4 :

  1. H2SO4 is used in the manufacture of fertilisers e.g. ammonium sulphate, super phosphate.
  2. Petroleum refining

Question 25.
Which form of sulphur shows paramagnetism?
Answer:
In vapour state sulphur partly exists as S2 molecule which has two unpaired electrons in the antibonding π* orbitals. Hence exhibits paramagnetism.

Question 26.
How is the presence of SO2 detected?
Answer:
SO2 decolourises KMnO4 solution in acid medium.
5SO2 + 2\(\mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}\) + 2H2O → 5\(\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\) + 4H+ + 2Mn++

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 27.
Why are group-16 elements called chal- cogens ?
Answer:
The elements Oxygen, Sulphur, Selenium, Tellurium of group 16- are collectively known as chalcogens meaning ‘ore forming’. Since many metals occur as oxides or sulphides in nature. The name is derived from the Greek word for brass. It indicates the association of sulphur and its congeners with copper.

Question 28.
Among chalcogens, which has highest electronegativity and which has highest electron gain enthalpy? ‘
Answer:
Oxygen has highest electronegativity (3.5 Pauling scale) among chalcogens. Sulphur has highest electron gain enthalpy among chalcogens.

Question 29.
Which hydride of group-16 has highest boiling point and weakest acidic character ?
Answer:
H2O (water)

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 30.
Justify the placement of O, S, Se, Te and Po in the same group of the periodic table in terms of electronic configuration, oxida-tion states and hydride formation.
Answer:
Electronic configuration: All the elements of group 16 have six electrons in the outermost shell and have ns2np4 general electronic configuration.

Oxidation states:
General oxidation states of Group 16 elements are -2, +2, +4 and +6. Oxygen cannot show higher oxidation states +4, +6 because of non-availability of d-orbitals in the valence shell. Sulphur, Selenium, and Tellurium usually show +4 oxidation state in their compounds with oxygen and +6 with fluorine. The stability of +6 oxidation state decreases down the group and stability of +4 oxidation state increases. This is due to inert pair effect.

Hydride formation :
All the chalcogens form covalent hydrides of the formula H2E. (E = S, Se, Te, Po)

Thermal stability of the hydrides decreases from H2O to H2Po. This is due to an increase in E – H bond length.

Water is a liquid while others are gases. Water exists as associated liquid due to hydrogen bonding.

The acidic character in aqueous solution increases from H2O to H2Te. This is due to decrease in charge density on conjugate bases OH, SH, SeH, TeH.

All the hydrides except water possess reducing property. The reducing property increases from H2O to H2Po. This trend can be attributed to decrease in thermal stability of hydrides from H2O to H2Po.

Thus there is a regular gradation in properties of these elements. Hence the inclusion of these elements in the same group is justified.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 31.
Describe the manufacture of H2SO4 by contact process. [TS ’16]
Answer:
Manufacture of H2SO4 by Contact process involves three steps.
i) Burning of sulphur or sulphide ores in air to generate SO2.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 11O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO2

ii) Conversion of SO2 to SO3 by the reaction with oxygen in the presence of a catalyst (V2O5).
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 8

iii) Absorption of SO3 in H2SO4 to give oleum.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7

iv) Dilution of oleum with water gives sul-phuric acid.
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4

Question 32.
How is ozone prepared? How does it react with the following ? [Mar. 19, 18, 17, AP]
a) PbS
b)KI
c) Hg
d) Ag
Answer:
Preparation of Ozone :
When a slow dry stream of oxygen is passed through a silent electrical discharge, oxygen is converted to ozone. This product is called ozonised oxygen.
3O2 → 2O3, ∆H° (298K) = +142 kJ/mol.
If high concentration of ozone (> 10%) is required, a battery of ozonisers can be used. Pure ozone can be condensed in a vessel surrounded by liquid oxygen.
Properties:
a) Pbs is oxidised to PbSO4.
PbS (s) + 4O3 (g) → PbSO4 + 4O2
b) I2 is liberated. I is oxidised to I2.
2KI(aq) + H2O (l) + O3(g) → 2KOH(aq) + I2(s) + O3(g)

c) Hg2O formed sticks to the glass surface and mercury loses its meniscus due to dissolution of Hg2O in Hg. This is called tailing of mercury.
2Hg + O3 → Hg2O + O2

d) Silver metal is blackened. This is due to oxidation of the metal to its oxide
2Ag + O3 → Ag2O + O2 (oxidation)

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 33.
Write a short note on the allotropy of sulphur.
Answer:
Sulphur forms numerous allotropes. The two common crystalline forms are α (alpha) or rhombic sulphur and β (beta) or monoclinic sulphur. The stable form at room temperature is rhombic sulphur. It transforms to monoclinic sulphur when heated above 369K.

Rhombic sulphur:
This is yellow in colour. It is formed by evaporating the solution of roll sulphur in CS2. It is soluble in CS2. m.p. 385.8K.

Monoclinic sulphur:
This form of sulphur is prepared by melting rhombic sulphur in a dish and cooling the solution till crust is formed. Two holes are made in the crust and remaining liquid poured out.

α – sulphur transforms to β – sulphur above 369K. At 369K both are stable. This temperature is called transition temperature.
Both forms have S8 puckered ring forms. It has a crown shape.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 9
In cyclo – S6, the ring adopts chair form. At 1000K, S2 is the dominant species and is paramagnetic like O2.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 10

Question 34.
How does S02 react with the following?
a) Na2SO3 (aq)
b) Cl2
c) Fe3+ ions
d) KMnO4
Answer:
a) When SO2 is passed into sodium sulphite solution, sodium hydrogen sulphite is formed.
Na2SO3 + H2O + SO2 → 2NaHSO3

b) SO2 reacts with chlorine in the presence of charcoal to give sulphuryl chloride.
SO2(g) + Cl2(g) → SO2Cl2 (l)

c) SO2 reduces Fe3+ ions to Fe2+ ions.
2Fe3+ + SO2 + 2H2O → 2Fe2+ + SO42- + 4H+

d) It decolourises KMnO4.
5SO2 + 2MnO4 + 2H2O → 5SO42- + 4H+ + 2Mn++

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 35.
Starting from elemental sulphur, how is H2S04 prepared?
Answer:
Manufacture of H2SO4 by Contact process involves three steps.
i) Burning of sulphur or sulphide ores in air to generate SO2.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 11O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO2

ii) Conversion of SO2 to SO3 by the reaction with oxygen in the presence of a catalyst (V2O5).
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 8

iii) Absorption of SO3 in H2SO4 to give oleum.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7

iv) Dilution of oleum with water gives sul-phuric acid.
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4

Question 36.
Describe the structures (shapes) of SO4-2 and SO3.
Answer:
Structure of SO3: SO3 has planar triangular shape in the gas phase. S is in sp2 hybridisation. Bond angle is 120°. S-O bond length 143pm,

In SO3, sulphur is in second excited state.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 11
In the solid state it may be cyclic or chain.

Structure of Sulphite ion SO4– –
SO4– – is tetrahedral in shape. Bond angle is 109°28′: S – O bond length 149pm.
Sulphur undergoes sp3 hybridisation.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 12

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 37.
Which oxide of sulphur can act as both oxidising and reducing agent? Give one example each.
Answer:
SO2 acts both as oxidising and reducing agent.

  1. H2S is oxidised to sulphur.
    SO2 + 2H2S → 2H2O + 3S
  2. Fe3+ is reduced to Fe2+
    2Fe3+ + SO2 + 2H2O → 2Fe2+ + SO42- + 4H+

Question 38.
Explain the conditions favourable for the formation of SO3 from SO2 in the contact process of H2SO4.
Answer:
2SO2 (g) + O2(g) → 2SO3 (g); ∆H = -196 kj/mol
The reaction is exothermic and reversible. Forward reaction leads to a decrease in volume. Therefore, low temperature and high pressure are favourable for maximum yield.

In practice, the plant is operated at a pressure of 2 bar and a temperature of 720K.

Question 39.
Complete the following.
a) KCl + H2SO4(conc.) →
b) Sucrose TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 13
c) Cu + H2SO4(conc.) →
d) C + H2SO4 (conc.) →
Answer:
a) HCl gas evolves.
2KCl + H2SO4 → K2SO4 + 2HCl

b) It removes water from carbohydrates.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 14

c) SO2 gas evolves. Cu is oxidised.
Cu . 2H2SO4 → CuSO4 + SO2 + 2H2O

d) C is oxidised to CO2.
C + 2H2SO4 →CO2 + 2SO2 + 2H2O

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 40.
Which is used for drying ammonia?
Answer:
Ammonia is dried using quick lime CaO.

Question 41.
Why cone. H2SO4, P4O10 and anhydrous CaCl2 cannot be used for dry ammonia? (Hint: ammonia reacts with them forming (NH4)2SO4 : (NH4)3 PO4 and CaCl2. 8 NH3
Answer:
Ammonia forms (NH4)3 PO4 with P4O10
Ammonia reacts with CaCl2 forming CaCl2 8NH3. Hence they cannot be used for drying ammonia.

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 42.
Explain in detail the manufacture of sulphuric acid by contact process. [Mar. 2018 – TS]
Answer:
Contact process consists of three stages,
i) Burning of suphur or sulphide ores in air to generate SO2.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 11O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO2

ii) SO2 is oxidised to SO3 in presence of V2O5.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 15
∆H = 196 kJ, mol-1

iii) Absorption of SO3 in H2SO4 to give oleum.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7
Low temperature and high pressure are favourable for high yield of SO3. In practice, a pressure of 2 bar and a temperature of 720K are employed.

The SO3 gas from the catalytic converter is absorbed in concentrated H2SO4 to produce oleum. Dilution of oleum with water gives H2SO4 of the desired concentration.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 16

Question 43.
How is ozone prepared from oxygen? Explain its reaction with [AP Mar. ’18, 17, 16; 1PE ‘ 13,’ 14]
a) C2H4
b) KI
c) Hg
d) PbS
Answer:
Preparation of Ozone : When a slow dry stream of oxygen is passed through a silent electrical discharge, oxygen is converted to ozone. This product is called ozonised oxygen.
3O2 → 2O3, ∆H° (298K) = +142 kJ/mol.
If high concentration of ozone (> 10%) is required, a battery of ozonisers can be used. Pure ozone can be condensed in a vessel surrounded by liquid oxygen.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

a) Ethylene reacts with ozone to form ethylene ozonide.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 17

b) Iodide is oxidised to Iodine.
2KI + H2O + O3 → 2KOH + I2 + O2

c) Mercury is oxidised to Hg2O by ozone.
As Hg2O dissolves in Hg, Hg loses its meniscus and sticks to glass surface. It is called ‘tailing of mercury’.
2Hg + O3 → Hg2O + O2

d) PbS is oxidised to PbSO4 by O3.
PbS + 4O3 → PbSO4 + 4O2

Intext Questions – Answers

Question 1.
List the important sources of sulphur.
Answer:

  1. Sulphur exists primarily such as gypsum CaSO4 . 2H2O.
  2. Epsom salt MgSO4 . 7H2O
  3. Sulphides such as
    galena PbS
    zinc blende ZnS
  4. eggs, proteins, garlic, onion ……………

Question 2.
Write the order of thermal stability of the hydrides of Group 16 elements
Answer:
The thermal stability of hydrides of Group -16 decreases from H2O to H2PO.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 3.
Why is H2O a liquid and H2S a gas at room temperature and pressure ?
Answer:
There is molecular association through hydrogen bonds in H2O. But, there is no such molecular association through hydrogen bond in H2S. H and H2O exists as liquid while H2S exists as gas.

Question 4.
Which of the following does not react with oxygen directly ? Zn, Ti, Pt, Fe
Answer:
Platinum.

Question 5.
Complete the following reactions :
i) C2H4 + O2
ii) 4 Al + 3O2
Answer:
i) C2H4 + 3O2 → 2CO2 + 2H2O
ii) 4 Al + 3O2 → 2 Al2O3

Question 6.
Why does O3 act as a powerful oxidizing agent?
Answer:
O3 can easily release nascent oxygen. Hence, it acts as powerful oxidizing agent.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 7.
How is O3 estimated quantitatively ?
Answer:
O3 reacts with excess of Kl solution and liberates Iodine. The liberated Iodine is titrated against a standard solution of sodium Thiosulphate.

Question 8.
What happens when SO2 is passed through an aqueous solution of Fe(III) salt ?
Answer:
It reduces Fe(lII) salts to Fe(II) salts.
2Fe+3 + SO2 + 2H2O → 2Fe+2 + SO4-2 + 4H+

Question 9.
Comment on the nature of two S-O bonds formed in S02 molecule. Are the two S-O bonds in this molecule equal ?
Answer:
The two S-O bonds in SO2 molecule are covalent and they are not equal. One oxygen is linked by single bond and the other oxygen is linked by double bond. The S-O bond length is larger than S = O bond length.

Question 10.
How is the presence of SO2 detected ?
Answer:
Due to the strong pungent smell, the presence of SO2 can be detected. It decolourises acidified KMNO4 solution.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 11.
Mention three areas in which H2SO4 plays an important role.
Answer:

  1. H2SO4 is used for manufacture of fertilisers. e.g.: ammoium sulphate
  2. Petroleum refining
  3. Detergent industry
  4. Metallurgical applications e.g.: electro-plating and galvanising.

Question 12.
Write the conditions to maximise the yield of H2SO4 by Contact process ?
Answer:
The yield of H2SO4 can be maximised by maintaining the following conditions.
a) low temperatures (720 k)
b) high pressures (2 bar).

Question 13.
Why is Ka2 < < Ka1 for in water?
Answer:
H2SO4 is a very strong acid in water largely because of its first ionisation to H3O+ and \(\mathrm{HSO}_4^{-}\). The ionisation of \(\mathrm{HSO}_4^{-}\) to H3O+ and SO42- is very very small.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 18
Hence , Ka2 < < Ka1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type

Students must practice these Maths 2B Important Questions TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Evaluate \(\int_0^{\pi / 2} \frac{d x}{4+5 \cos x}\). [(TS) May ’18; (AP) Mar. ’16, ’15]
Solution:
Put tan \(\frac{x}{2}\) = t then \(\sec ^2 \frac{x}{2} \cdot \frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~d} x=\mathrm{dt}\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q1

Question 2.
Evaluate \(\int_0^{\pi / 4} \frac{\sin x+\cos x}{9+16 \sin 2 x} d x\). [(AP) Mar. ’17; (TS) May ’15]
Solution:
Put sin x – cos x = t
⇒ (sin x – cos x)2 = t2
(cos x + sin x ) dx = dt
sin2x + cos2x – 2 sin x cos x = t2
1 – sin 2x = t2
sin 2x = 1 – t2
Lower limit: x = 0 ⇒ t = -1
Upper limit: x = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) ⇒ t = 0
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q2.1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 3.
Evaluate \(\int_0^1 \frac{\log (1+x)}{1+x^2} d x\). [(TS) Mar. ’20; (TS) May ’19, ’17; ’12]
Solution:
Put x = tan θ
then dx = sec2θ dθ
Lower limit: x = 0 ⇒ θ = 0
Upper limit: x = 1 ⇒ θ = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q3
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q3.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q3.2

Question 4.
Show that \(\int_0^{\pi / 2} \frac{x}{\sin x+\cos x} d x=\frac{\pi}{2 \sqrt{2}} \log (\sqrt{2}+1)\). [(AP) Mar. ’20, ’18; ’17 (TS)]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q4
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q4.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q4.2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q4.3

Question 5.
Evaluate \(\int_0^{\pi / 2} \frac{\sin ^2 x}{\cos x+\sin x} d x\). [(TS) May ’15]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q5
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q5.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q5.2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q5.3

Question 6.
Evaluate \(\int_0^\pi \frac{x}{1+\sin x} d x\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q6
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q6.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q6.2

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 7.
Evaluate \(\int_0^\pi \frac{x \sin x}{1+\sin x} d x\). [Mar. ’16 (TS); May; Mar. ’15 (AP); March ’13]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q7
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q7.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q7.2

Question 8.
Evaluate \(\int_0^\pi \frac{x \sin x}{1+\cos ^2 x} d x\). [(AP) May ’18, ’16, ’14]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q8
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q8.1

Question 9.
Evaluate \(\frac{x \sin ^3 x}{1+\cos ^2 x} d x\). [(TS) May ’18; Mar. ’15]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q9
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q9.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q9.2

Question 10.
Evaluate \(\int_3^7 \sqrt{\frac{7-x}{x-3}} d x\)
Solution:
Put x = 3 cos2θ + 7 sin2θ then
dx = (3 . 2 cos θ (-sin θ) + 7 . 2 sin θ cos θ) dθ
= (-3 . 2 sin θ . cos θ + 7 . 2 sin θ cos θ) dθ
= 4 . 2 sin θ cos θ dθ
= 4 sin 2θ dθ
7 – x = 7 – 3 cos2θ – 7 sin2θ
= 7(1- sin2θ) – 3 cos2θ
= 7 cos2θ – 3 cos2θ
= 4 cos2θ
x – 3 = 3 cos2θ + 7 sin2θ – 3
= -3(1 – cos2θ) + 7 sin2θ
= -3 sin2θ + 7 sin2θ
= 4 sin2θ
Lower limit: x = 3 ⇒ θ = 0
Upper limit: x = 7 ⇒ θ = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q10

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 11.
Show that the area enclosed between the curves y2 = 12(x + 3) and y2 = 20(5 – x) is \(64 \sqrt{\frac{5}{3}}\).
Solution:
Given curves are y2 = 12(x + 3)
y = \(2 \sqrt{3} \sqrt{x+3}\) ……(1)
y2 = 20(5 – x)
y = \(2 \sqrt{5} \sqrt{5-x}\) ……..(2)
Solving (1) and (2)
\(2 \sqrt{3} \sqrt{x+3}\) = \(2 \sqrt{5} \sqrt{5-x}\)
squaring on both sides
12(x + 3) = 20(5 – x)
⇒ 3x + 9 = 25 – 5x
⇒ 8x = 16
⇒ x = 2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q11
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q11.1

Question 12.
Show that the area of the region bounded by \(\frac{x^2}{a^2}+\frac{y^2}{b^2}=1\) (ellipse) is πab. Also, deduce the area of the circle x2 + y2 = a2. [(AP) May ’17; Mar. ’14]
Solution:
Given ellipse is \(\frac{x^2}{a^2}+\frac{y^2}{b^2}=1\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q12
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q12.1
∴ Required area = πab sq. units
If b = a, the ellipse \(\frac{x^2}{a^2}+\frac{y^2}{b^2}=1\) becomes circle as, x2 + y2 = a2.
Area of circle = πa(a) = πa2 (since b = a).

Question 13.
Let AOB be the positive quadrant of the ellipse \(\frac{x^2}{a^2}+\frac{y^2}{b^2}=1\) with OA = a, OB = b. Then show that the area bounded between the chord AB and the arc AB of the ellipse is \(\frac{(\pi-2) a b}{4}\).
Solution:
Given equation of ellipse is \(\frac{x^2}{a^2}+\frac{y^2}{b^2}=1\)
Since A = (a, 0) and B = (0, b).
We have the equation of chord AB is \(\frac{x}{a}+\frac{y}{b}=1\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q13
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q13.1

Question 14.
m Find the area bounded between the curves y2 = 4ax, x2 = 4by. [(AP) May ’19]
Solution:
Given curves are
y2 = 4ax ………(1)
⇒ y = \(\sqrt{a} \sqrt{x} 2\)
x2 = 4by ………(2)
⇒ y = \(\frac{x^2}{4 b}\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q14
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q14.1

Question 15.
Find the area bounded between the curves y2 = 4ax, x2 = 4ay.
Solution:
Given curves are y2 = 4ax
⇒ y = \(2 \sqrt{a} \sqrt{x}\) …….(1)
x2 = 4ay
⇒ y = \(\frac{x^2}{4 a}\) ………(2)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q15
Solving (1) & (2)
\(2 \sqrt{a} \sqrt{x}\) = \(\frac{x^2}{4 a}\)
squaring on both sides
4ax = \(\frac{x^4}{16 a^2}\)
⇒ x4 = 64a3x
⇒ x4 – 64a3x = 0
⇒ x(x3 – 64a3) = 0
⇒ x = 0 (or) x3 – 64a3 = 0
⇒ x3 = 64a3
⇒ x = 4a
∴ x = 0, 4a
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L1 Q15.1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 16.
Evaluate \(\int_a^b \sqrt{(\mathbf{x}-\mathbf{a})(\mathbf{b}-\mathbf{x})} \mathbf{d x}\). [Mar. ’18 (TS)]
Solution:
Put x = a cos2θ + b sin2θ
dx = [a(2 cos θ) (-sin θ) + b 2 sin θ cos θ] dθ
= [-a sin 2θ + b sin 2θ] dθ
= (b – a) sin 2θ dθ
Now, x – a = a cos2θ + b sin2θ – a
= -a(1 – cos2θ) + b sin2θ
= -a sin2θ + b sin2θ
= (b – a) sin2θ
b – x = b – a cos2θ – b sin2θ
= b(1 – sin2θ) – a cos2θ
= b cos2θ – a cos2θ
= (b – a) cos2θ
Lower limit: x = a ⇒ θ = 0
Upper limit: x = b ⇒ θ = π/2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q1.1

Question 17.
Find \(\int_{-a}^a\left(x^2+\sqrt{a^2-x^2}\right) d x\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q2

Question 18.
Evaluate \(\int_0^\pi x \sin ^3 x d x\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q3
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q3.1

Question 19.
Find \(\int_0^\pi x \sin ^7 x \cos ^6 x d x\). [Mar. ’19 (TS)]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q4
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q4.1

Question 20.
If In = \(\int_0^{\pi / 2} \sin ^n x d x\), then show that In = \(\frac{n-1}{n} I_{n-2}\). [Mar. ’15 (TS)]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q5

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 21.
If In = \(\int_0^{\pi / 2} \cos ^n x d x\), then show that In = \(\frac{\mathbf{n}-1}{n} I_{n-2}\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q6
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q6.1

Question 22.
The circle x2 + y2 = 8 is divided into two parts by the parabola 2y = x2. Find the area of both parts.
Solution:
Given, the circle x2 + y2 = 8 ……..(1)
⇒ y = \(\sqrt{8-x^2}\)
The parabola is 2y = x2 ……..(2)
⇒ y = \(\frac{x^2}{2}\)
Solving (1) and (2)
2y + y2 = 8
⇒ y2 + 2y – 8 = 0
⇒ (y + 4)(y – 2) = 0
⇒ y = -4 or y = 2
From (1) ⇒ x2 + (-4)2 = 8
x2 = 8 – 16
-8 ≠ 8
From (2) ⇒ x2 = 2(2)
∴ x = ±2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q7
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q7.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q7.2

Question 23.
If In = \(\int_0^{\pi / 4} \tan ^n x d x\), then show that In+ In-2 = \(\frac{1}{n-1}\). [Mar. ’06, ’99, ’98]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q8
Put tan x = t
sec2x dx = dt
Lower limit: x = 0 ⇒ t = 0
Upper limit: x = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) ⇒ t = 1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q8.1
∴ In + In-2 = \(\frac{1}{n-1}\)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 24.
If \(I_{m, n}=\int_0^{\pi / 2} \sin ^m x \cos ^n x d x\), then show that \(I_{m, n}=\frac{m-1}{m+n} I_{m-2, n}\). [May ’99]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q9
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q9.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q9.2

Question 25.
Evaluate \(\int_2^6 \sqrt{(6-x)(x-2)} d x\)
Solution:
Put x = 2cos2θ + 6sin2θ then
dx = [2(2) cos θ . (-sin θ) + 6(2) sin θ cos θ] dθ
= [-(2) . 2 sin θ cos θ + 6(2) sin θ cos θ] dθ
= [-2 . sin 2θ + 6 sin 2θ] dθ
= 4 sin 2θ dθ
6 – x = 6 – 2 cos2θ – 6 sin2θ
= 6(1 – sin2θ) – 2 cos2θ
= 6 cos2θ – 2 cos2θ
= 4 cos2θ
x – 2 = 2 cos2θ + 6 sin2θ – 2
= -2(1 – cos2θ) + 6 sin2θ
= -2 sin2θ + 6 sin2θ
= 4 sin2θ
Lower limit: x = 2 ⇒ θ = 0
Upper limit: x = 6 ⇒ θ = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q10
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q10.1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 26.
Evaluate \(\int_4^9 \frac{d x}{\sqrt{(9-x)(x-4)}}\)
Solution:
Put x = 4 cos2θ + 9 sin2θ then
dx = [4(2) cos θ (-sin θ) + 9(2) sin θ . cos θ] dθ = 0
= (-4 sin 2θ + 9 sin 2θ) dθ
= 5 sin 2θ dθ
9 – x = 9 – 4 cos2θ – 9 sin2θ
= 9(1 – sin2θ) – 4 cos2θ
= 9 cos2θ – 4 cos2θ
= 5 cos2θ
x – 4 = 4 cos2θ + 9 sin2θ – 4
= -4 (1 – cos2θ) + 9 sin2θ
= -4 sin2θ + 9 sin2θ
= 5 sin2θ
Lower limit: x = 4 ⇒ θ = 0
Upper limit: x = 9 ⇒ θ = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Long Answer Type L2 Q11

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(a) Group-15 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Why does the reactivity of nitrogen differ from phosphorus?
Answer:
Nitrogen has unique ability to form pπ – pπ multiple bonds with itself and with other elements having small size and high electro-negativity. Nitrogen exists as a diatomic molecule with a triple bond (N ≡ N) between the two atoms. Consequently its bond enthalpy (941.4 kJ mol-1) is very high. On the contrary phosphorus forms single bonds (p – p.) Hence, the reactivity of Nitrogen differ from phosphorus.

White phosphorus is less stable and therefore more reactive, because of angular strain in the P4 molecule where the angles are only 60°. Hence phosphorous is much more reactive than nitrogen.

Question 2.
How is nitrogen prepared in the laboratory ? Write the chemical equations of the reactions involved.
Answer:
In the laboratory, dinitrogen is prepared by treating an aqueous solution of ammonium chloride with sodium nitrite.
NH4Cl (aq) + NaNO2(aq) → N2(g) + 2H2O(l) + NaCl (aq)
It can also be obtained by thermal decomposition of ammonium dichromate.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 3.
Nitrogen exists as diatomic molecule and phosphorus as P4. Why? [TS 15]
Answer:
Nitrogen has unique ability to form pπ – pπ multiple bonds with itself and with other elements having small size and high electronegativity. Thus nitrogen exists as a diatomic molecule with a triple bond between the two atoms. Phosphorus forms p-p single bonds and exists as P4 molecule.

As it has large size and lower eiectro- negavitity it does not form pπ – pπ multiple bonds with itself.

Question 4.
Why does nitrogen show catenation properties less them phosphorus ?
Answer:
Single N – N bond is weaker than the single P – P bond because of high electronic repulsion of the non-bonding electrons, owing to small bond length. Hence nitrogen shows less catenation property than phosphorus.

Question 5.
Nitrogen molecule is highly stable. Why? [IPE ’14]
Answer:
Nitrogen exists as a diatomic molecule with a triple bond between the two atoms (N ≡ N), The bond enthalpy of N2 is very high (941.4 kj. mol-1). Hence, nitrogen molecule is highly stable.

Question 6.
Why are the compounds of bismuth more stable in +3 oxidation state?
Answer:
The common oxidation states of Bismuth are +3 and +5. The stability of +5 oxidation state decreases and that of +3 state increases due to inert pair effect.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 7.
What is allotropy? Explain the different allotropic forms of phosphorus.
Answer:
Occurrence of an element in different physical forms with similar chemical properties but different physical properties is called allotropy.
Phosphorus is found in many allotropic forms, they are :
a) White or Yellow – P
b) Scarlet – P
c) Red – P
d) Violet – P
e) α – black – P and β – black – P

Question 8.
How do you account for the inert character of dinitrogen ?
Answer:
Nitrogen exists as a diatomic molecule with a triple bond N ≡ N.
The bond dissociation enthalpy of N ≡ N is very high. (941.4kJ mol-1).
As, such a high energy is not available at room temperature nitrogen is inert.

Question 9.
Explain the difference in the structures of white and red phosphorus.
Answer:
White phosphorus is less stable and there fore more reactive because of angular strain in the P4 molecule. The bond angle in P4 is 60° only.
It consists of discrete tetrahedral P4 molecules. These molecules are held by van der Waal’s forces.
Red phosphorus is polymeric consisting of chains of P4 tetrahedra linked through covalent bonds. Hence less reactive.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 2

Question 10.
How is a-black phosphorus prepared from red phosphorus ?
Answer:
When red phosphorus is heated in a sealed tube at 803K, a-black phosphorus is obtained.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 11.
Write the difference between the properties of white and red phosphorus.
Answer:

White PhosphorusRed Phosphorus
1. Highly reactive.1. Less reactive.
2. Consists of discrete P4 units held by van der Waal’s forces.2. Consists of P4 units linked through covalent bonds.
3. Glows in dark.3. Does not glow in dark.
4. Poisonous.4. Non -poisonous.
5. Insoluble in water but soluble in carbon disulphide.5. Insoluble in water as well as in carbon disulphide.

Question 12.
What is inert pair effect?
Answer:
The reluctance of electron pair in the outermost s-orbital to uncouple and take part in bonding is called inert pair effect.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 13.
Explain why is NH3 basic while BiH3 is only feebly basic.
Answer:
Ability to donate electron pair decreases as the atomic size increases from NH3 to BiH3. This is due to decrease in electron density. Hence NH3 is basic while BiH3 is feebly basic.

Question 14.
Arrange the hydrides of group-15 elements in the increasing order of basic strength and decreasing order of reducing character.
Answer:
Basic strength
NH3 > PH3 > AsH3 > SbH3 > BiH3
Reducing character
NH3 < PH3 < AsH3 < SbH3 < BiH3

Question 15.
PH3 is a weaker base than NH3 – Explain.
Answer:
Atomic size of phosphorous is more than that of Nitrogen. Ability to donate electron pair decreases from NH3 to PH3. Hence PH3 is weaker base than NH3.

Question 16.
A hydride of group-15 elements dissolves in water to form a basic solution. This solution dissolves the AgCl precipitate. Name the hydride. Write the chemical equations involved.
Answer:
The hydride is NH3.
NH3 + H2O > NH4OH
AgCl + 2NH3 > [Ag(NH3)+Cl

Question 17.
What happens when white phosphorus is heated with cone. NaOH solution in an inert atmospnere of CO2 ? [AP Mar. ’19 ; AP ’15]
Answer:
Phosphine is formed.
P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2O → PH3 ↑ + 3NaH2PO2 sodium hypophosphite

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 18.
NH3 forms hydrogen bonds but PH3 does not. Why ? [TS ’15]
Answer:
N-H bond is more polar while P-H bond, is less polar. Nitrogen is a small atom with high electronegativity. Hence N-H bond is more polar. So, NH3 can form hydrogen bonds.

Question 19.
The HNH angle is higher than HPH, HAsH and HSbH angles- Why?
Answer:
The NH3 molecule is trigonal pyramidal. This shape results from the sp3 hybridisation of central atom. The decrease in the bond angle in HPH, HAsH and HSbH is due to increase in the size of the central atoms.

Question 20.
How do calcium phosphide and heavy water react?
Answer:
Calcium phosphide reacts with heavy water forming Calcium Deuteroxide and Deuterophosphine.
Ca3P2 + 6H2O → 3Ca(OH)2 + 2PD3

Question 21.
Ammonia is a good complexing agent. Explain with an example. [IPE ’14]
Answer:
Ammonia can donate an electron pair and form dative bond. Hence ammonia can form complex compounds.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 3

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 22.
A mixture of Ca3P2 and CaC2 is used in making Holme’s signal – Explain. [AP ’16]
Answer:
The spontaneous combustion of phosphine is technically used in Holme’s signals. Containers containing calcium phosphide and calcium carbide are pierced and thrown in the sea when the gases evolved burn and serve as a signal.

Question 23.
Which chemical compound is formed in the brown ring test of nitrate ions ?
Answer:
Fe2+ reduces \(\mathrm{NO}_3^{-}\) to NO.
No forms brown coloured complex with Fe2+
[Fe(H2O)6]2+ + NO > [Fe(H2O)5NO]2+ (brown) + H2O

Question 24.
Give the resonating structures of NO, and N2O5.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 4

Question 25.
Why does R3P = O exist but R3N = O does not (R = alkyl group)?
Answer:
Nitrogen cannot form R3N = O because of absence of d-orbitals in its valence shell. Nitrogen cannot form dπ – pπ bond as the heavier elements can e.g. R3P = O.

Question 26.
How is nitric oxide (NO) prepared?
Answer:
Nitric oxide is obtained by the reduction of dilute HNO3 with copper.
3Cu + 8HNO3 → 2NO + SCu(NO3)2 + 4H2O

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 27.
Give one example each of normal oxide and mixed oxide of nitrogen.
Answer:
Normal oxide : NO2, NO.
Mixed oxide : N2O3

Question 28.
NO is paramagnetic in gaseous state but diamagnetic in liquid and solid states – Why?
Answer:
NO contains odd number of valence electrons. It exists as a monomer in gaseous state and hence paramagnetic. It dimerises in liquid and solid states and is converted to N2O2 molecule with even number of electrons. Hence NO is diamagnetic in liquid and solid states.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 5

Question 29.
Give an example of [Mar. 2018 – TS]
a) acidic oxide of phosphorus
b) neutral oxide of nitrogen.
Answer:
a) P2O3 and P2O5 are acidic oxides of phosphorus.
b) NO and N2O are neutral oxides of nitrogen.

Question 30.
Explain the following.
a) reaction of alkali with red phosphorous.
b) reaction between PCl3 and H3PO3.
Answer:
a) Red phosphorous is less reactive than white phosphorous, It does not react with alkali.
b) PCl3 + 5H3PO3 → 3H4P2O5 + 3HCl
Pyrophosphorous acid formed

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 31.
How does PCl3 react with
a) CH3COOH
b)C2H5OH and
c) water
Answer:
a) PCl3 reacts with CH3COOH to give acetyl chloride.
3CH3COOH + PCl3 → 3CH3COCl + H3PO3

b) Reacts with ethyl alcohol to give ethyl chloride.
3CH3CH2OH + PCl3 → 3C2H5Cl + H3PO3

c) Hydrolysis of PCl3 gives phosphorous acid.
PCl3 + 3H2O → H3PO3 + 3HCl

Question 32.
PCl3 can act as an oxidising as well as a reducing agent – Justify.
Answer:
1) PCl3 oxidises Sb to SbCl3.
Sb + PCl3 → SbCl3 + P
2) It reduces PCl3 to PCl5.
PCl3 + Cl2 → PCl5

Question 33.
Which of the following are not known ?
PCl3, ASCl3, SbCl3, NCl5, BiCl5, PH5
Answer:
NCl5, BiCl5, PH5.

Question 34.
Which of the following is more covalent – SbCl5 or SbCl3?
Answer:
SbCl5

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 35.
Write the oxidation states of phosphorous in solid PCl5.
Answer:
In the solid state PCl5 exists as an ionic solid [PCl4]+ [PCl6] in which the cation is [PCl4]+ and [PCl6] is anion.
Oxidation state of phosphorous in PCl4+ is + 5 and in PCl6 is + 5

Question 36.
Illustrate how copper metal can give different products on reaction with HNO3.
Answer:
With dilute HNO3, it gives NO.
3Cu + 8HNO3 (dilute) → 3Cu (NO3)2 + 2NO + 4H2O
With cone. HNO3, NO2 is obtained.
Cu + 4HNO3 (conc) → Cu(NO3)2 + 2NO2 + 2H2O

Question 37.
Which oxide of nitrogen has oxidation number of N same as that in nitric acid?
Answer:
Nitrogen in N2O5 has same oxidation number as in Nitric acid.

Question 38.
Write the chemical reactions, that occur in the manufacture of nitric acid.
Answer:
Nitric acid is manufactured by Ostwald’s process and the following chemical reactions will occur.
4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 6 4NO(g) + 6H2O(g)
2NO (g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2NO2 (g)
3NO2(g) + H2O(l) → 2HNO3(aq) + NO(g)

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 39.
Iron becomes passive in cone HNO3. Why ?
Answer:
Iron becomes passive in cone. HNO3 because of formation of a passive film of oxide on the surface.

Question 40.
Give the uses of
a) nitric acid and
b) ammonia.
Answer:
a) Uses of nitric acid :

  1. It is used in the manufacture of NH4NO3 for fertilisers and other nitrates for use in explosives,
  2. It is used in the preparation of nitro-glycerin, trinitrotoluene and other nitro compounds.

b) Uses of Ammonia:

  1. Ammonia is used to produce various nitrogeneous ferti- Users, (amonium nitrate, urea etc),
  2. In the Ostwald process for preparation of HNO3.
  3. Liquid ammonia is used as refrigerant.

Question 41.
What are the oxidation states of phosphorus in the following ?
i) H3PO3
ii) PCl3
iii) Ca3P2
iv)Na3PO4
v) POF3
Answer:
i) H3PO3 ; 3 + x – 6 = 0; x = +3
ii) PCl3 ; x – 3 = 0 ; x = +3
iii) + 6 + 2x = 0 ; 2x = -6 ; x = – 3
iv) + 3 + x – 8 = 0 ; x – 5 = 0 ; x = +5
v) x – 2 – 3 = 0 ; x = + 5

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 42.
H3PO3 is diprotic while H3PO2 is monoprotic – Why?
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 7
The H atoms which are attached with oxygen in P – OH form are ionisable and cause basicity. As per the structure, H3PO3 is diprotic while H3PO2 is monoprotic.

Question 43.
Give the disproportionation reaction of H3PO3.
Answer:
Orthophosphorus acid on heating disproportionates to give orthophosphoric acid and phosphine.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 8

Question 44.
H3PO2 is a good reducing agent – Explain with an example.
Answer:
H3PO2 contains two P – H bonds and reduces AgNO3 to metallic silver.
4AgNO3 + 2H2O + H3PO2 → 4Ag + 4HNO3 + H3PO4

Question 45.
Draw the structures of
a) Hypo phosphoric acid
b) Cyclic meta phosphoric acid.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 9

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 46.
Discuss the general characteristics of Group-15 elements with reference to their electronic configuration, oxidation state, atomic size, ionisation enthalpy and electronegativity.
Answer:
Nitrogen, Phosphorous, Arsenic, Antimony and Bismuth are included in Group-15.
Metallic Nature: Nitrogen and Phosphorus are non-metals, Arsenic, Antimony are metalloids and Bismuth is a metal.
Electronic configuration : The valence shell electronic configuration of these elements is
Nitrogen 7 → 1s22s22p3
Phosphorus 15 → 1s22s22p63s23p3

Oxidation states:
The common oxidation states of Group 15 elements are -3, +3 and +5. The tendency to exhibit -3 oxidation state decreases down the group. This is due to increase in size and metallic character.

The stability of +5 oxidation state decreases down the group. The stability of +5 oxidation state decreases and that of +3 state increases down the group due to inert pair effect.

Nitrogen exhibits +1, +2, +4 oxidation states also. Phosphorus also shows +1 and +4 oxidation states in some oxoacids.

Nitrogen is restricted to maximum cova-lency of 4 since only four (one s and three p) orbitals are available for bonding. The heavier elements have vaccant d – orbitals which can be used for bonding.

Atomic size :
Covalent and ionic radii increase in size down the group. There is a considerable increase in covalent radius from N to P. However, from As to Bi only a small increase in covalent radius is observed. This is due to the presence of completely filled d and / or f – orbitals in heavier members.

Ionisation Enthalpy :
The ionisation enthalpy decreases down the group due to gradual increase in atomic size. The ionisation enthalpy of group 15 elements is much greater than that of group 14 elements in the corresponding periods. This is due to extra stable half-filled p-orbitals and small size of group 15 elements.

Electronegativity :
The electronegativity decreases down the group with increasing atomic size from N to Bi. However, amongst the heavier elements the difference is less.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 47.
Discuss the trends in chemical reactivity of group-15 elements.
Answer:
Nitrogen differs from the rest of the group 15 elements. This is due to its (i) small size (ii) high electronegativity (iii) high ionisation enthalpy and (iv) non-availability of d-orbitals.

The general oxidation states of group 15 elements are -3, +3 and +5. In Bismuth +3 is more stable than +5 oxidation state due to inert pair effect.

Hydrides: All the elements N to Bi form hydrides of the type EH3 where E = N to Bi.
The stability decreases from NH3 to BiH3.
Ammonia is mild reducing agent while BiH3 is the strongest reducing agent. Reducing character increases from NH3 to BiH3.
Basic character decreases from NH3 to BiH3. NH3 > PH3 > ASH3 > SbH3 > BiH3

Oxides:
These elements form two types of oxides E2O3 and E2O5. However nitrogen forms number of oxides due to pn – pn multiple bonding between nitrogen and oxygen atoms.

These oxides are acidic and acidic character decreases from N2O3 to Bi2O3. Similarly from N2O5 to Bi3O5 the acidic character decreases.

Pentoxides are more acidic than trioxides.

N2O3 and P2O3 are purely acidic. As2O3 and Sb2O3 are amphoteric. Bi2O3 is basic.

Halides :
Trihalides and pentahalidies are formed. Nitrogen does not form penta- halide due to non-availability of d – orbitals in its valence shell.

Pentahalides are more covalent than trihalides because the elements in the higher oxidation state exert more polarising power. All the trihalides of these elements except those of nitrogen are stable. Trihalides except BiF3 are covalent in nature.

Reactivity towards metals : All these elements react with metals to form their binary compounds exhibiting – 3 oxidation state.
Example: Ca3N2 (Calcium nitride)
Ca3P2 (Calcium phosphide)

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 48.
How does P4 react with the following ?
a) SOCl2
b) SO2Cl2
Answer:
a) P4 reacts with thionyl chloride SOCl2 to give PCl3.
P4 + 8 SOCl2 → 4PCl3 + 4SO2 + 2S2Cl2

b) PCl5 is formed when P4 reacts with SO2Cl2.
P4 + 10SO2Cl2 → 4PCl5 + 10SO2

Question 49.
Explain the anomalous nature of nitrogen in group -15.
Answer:
Nitrogen differs from the rest of the elements of Group-15 due to its small size, high electronegativity, high ionisation enthalpy and non-availability of d-orbitals.

Nitrogen has unique ability to form pπ – pπ multiple bonds with itself and with other elements (e.g.: C, O). Other elements cannot form pit – pn bonds as their atomic orbitals are large.

Thus nitrogen exists as N2 with triple bond. Consequently bond enthalpy is high (225 kcal / mole, or 941.4 kJ/mole). Hence it is i~ert at room temperature.

Catenation tendency is weaker in Nitrogen as the N – N single bond is weaker because of high repulsion of the non-bonding electrons owing to small bond length.

Nitrogen cannot form NCl5 because of the absence of d-orbitals in its valence shell.

Question 50.
Complete the following reactions:
a) Ca3P2 + H2O →
b) P4 + KOH →
c) CuSO4 + NH3
d) Mg + N2
e) (NH4)2 Cr2O7 TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 10
f) Decomposition of nitrous acid
Answer:
a) Phosphine is formed when calcium phosphide reacts with water.
Ca3P2 + H2O → 3Ca(OH)2 + 2PH3

b) P4 + KOH + 3H2O → ↑ PH3 T + 3KH2PO2 (Potassium hypophosphite)

c) CuSO4(aq) + NH3 (aq) ⇌ [Cu(NH3)4]2+(aq) + SO4-2 deep blue

d) At high temperatures N2 directly combines with Mg to form Mg3N2.
3Mg + N2 TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 10 Mg3N2

e) Nitrogen is evolved when Ammonium dichromate decomposes on heating.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 11

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 51.
How does PCl5 react with the following ?
a) Water
b) C2H5OH
c) CH3COOH
d) Ag
Answer:
a) PCl5 hydrolyses to give POCl3 and H3PO4.
PCl5 + H2O → POCl3 + 2HCl
POCl3+ 3H2O → H3PO4 + 3HCl

b) Ethyl chloride is formed.
C2H5OH + PCl5 → C2H5Cl + POCl3 + HCl

c) Acetyl chloride is formed.
CH3COOH + PCl5 → CH3COCl + POCl3 + HCl

d) Finely divided metals on heating with
PCl5 to give corresponding chlorides.
2Ag + PCl5 → 2AgCl + PCl3

Question 52.
Complete the following:
a) NH4NO3 TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 10
b) HNO3 + P4O10
c) Pb(NO3)2 TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 12
d) Zn + dil. HNO3
e) P4 + cone. HNO3 TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 10
f) HgCl2 + PH3
Answer:
a) Nitrous oxide forms.
NH4NO3 TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 12 N2O + 2H2O
b) 4HNO3 + P4O10 → 4HPO3 + 2N2O5
c) 2Pb(NO3)2 TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 10 2PbO + 4NO2 + O2
d) 4Zn + 10 HNO3 (dilute) → 4Zn(NO3)2 + 5H2O + N2O
e) P4 + 20HNO3 → 4H3PO4 + 20 NO3 + 4H2O
f) 3HgCl2 + 2PH3 → Hg3P2 + 6HCl

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 53.
How is ammonia manufactured by Haber’s process ? Explain the reactions of ammonia with [Mar. 2018 . AP]
a) ZnSO4 (aq)
b) CuSO4 (aq)
c) AgCl(s)
Answer:
On a large scale, ammonia is manufactured by Haber’s process.
N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g); ∆fH°= -46.1. kJmol-1
The optimum conditions for production of ammonia are a pressure of about 2000 × 105 Pa and a temperature of 700K. Iron oxide is the catalyst with small amounts of K2O and Al2O3.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 13
Compressed mixture of N2 and H2 in the volume ratio is heated to 700K at a pressure of 200 atm and passed over finely divided iron oxide mixed with small amounts of K2O and Al2O3. Ammonia formed is liquified and unreacted mixture of N2 and H2 again pumped into catalytic chamber.

a) With ZnSO4, Zinc hydroxide precipitate is formed.
ZnSO4 (aq) + 2NH4OH (aq) → Zn(OH)2 (s) + (NH4)2SO4 (aq)

b) When ammonia reacts with CuSO4, deep blue colouration is obtained.
CuSO4(aq) + 4NH3(aq) ⇌ [Cu(NH3)4]2+ (aq) + SO4-2 deep blue

c) AgCl dissolves in NH3.
AgCl + 2NH3 (aq) → [Ag(NH3)2]Cl (aq)

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 54.
How is nitric acid manufactured by Ostwald’s process ? How does it react with the following ? [TS Mar. 19 ; (AP ’17)]
a) Copper
b) Zn
c) S8
d) P4
Answer:
Ostwald’s process:
Step (1) : A mixture of ammonia and excess of atmospheric oxygen (1 : 10) is passed through a tower containing pt/Rh guaze catalyst maintained at 500 K temperature and 9 bar pressure. Then catalytic oxidation of NH3 takes place, forming Nitric oxide.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 14
Step (2) : The nitric oxide thus obtained is made to combine with oxygen. Then NO2 is obtained.
2NO(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2NO2(g)

Step (3) :The nitrogen dioxide, is dissolved in water to give nitric acid
3NO2(g) + H2O(l) → 2HNO3(aq) + NO(g)
The NO formed is recycled.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Reactions:
a) Copper: N02 gas is liberated
Cu + 4 HNO3 (conc) → Cu(NO3)2 + 2NO2 + 2H2O

b) Zinc : NO2 gas is liberated
Zn + 4 HNO3 (cone) → Zn(NO3)2 + 2H2O + 2NO2

c) Sulphur (S8) : Oxidation takes place forming sulphuric acid
S8 + 48 HNO3(conc) → 8H2SO4 + 48 NO2 + 16 H2O

d) Phosphorous (P4) : Oxidation takes place forming H3PO4
P4 + 20 HNO3 → 4H3PO4 + 20 NO2 + 4H2O

Intext Questions – Answers

Question 1.
Why are pentahalides more covalent than trihalides?
Answer:
Pentahalides are more covalent than trihalides because the elements in the higher oxidation state exert more polarising power.

Question 2.
Why is BiH3 the strongest reducing agent amongst the hydrides of Group 15 elements?
Answer:
Because BiH3 is least stable.

Question 3.
Why is N2 less reactive at room temperature ?
Answer:
Because of high bond enthalpy of N ≡ N.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 4.
Mention the conditions required to maximise the yield of ammonia.
Answer:
In Haber’s process
N2(g) + 3H2 (g) ⇌ 2NH3(g)
Conditions required for higher yield are

  1. High pressure = 200 atm
  2. Optimum temperature – 700 k
  3. Catalyst: Iron oxide mixed with K2O + Al2O3.

Question 5.
How does ammonia react with a solution of Cu++ (aq)?
Answer:
Cu++ (ag) + 4NH3 (aq) ⇌ \(\left[\mathrm{Cu}\left(\mathrm{NH}_3\right)_4\right]_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) deep blue
NH3 forms complexion with Cu++ by donating its lone pair of electrons, forming Tetraamine copper (II) ion.

Question 6.
What is the covalence of N in N2O5 structure ?
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 15
From the structure of N2O5, it is evident that the covalence of N in N2O5 is four.

Question 7.
Bond angle in \(\mathrm{PH}_4^{+}\) is higher than that in PH3. Why?
Answer:
In both PH4+ and PH3 the central P atom is sp3 hybridised. In \(\mathrm{PH}_4^{+}\) all the four orbitals are bonded whereas in PH3 there is a lone pair on P. Due to lone pair-bond pair repulsion in PH3 bond angle is less than 109°28′.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 8.
What happens when PCl5 is heated?
Answer:
It decomposes to give Cl2.
PCl5 → PCl3 + Cl2

Question 9.
What is the basicity of H3PO4?
Answer:
3

Question 10.
What happens when H3PO3 is heated? (or write the disproportion of H3PO3)
Answer:
Orthphosphoric acid and Phosphine are formed.
4H3PO3 → 3H3PO4 + PH3

Question 11.
What happen when white phosphorus is heated with conc. NaOH solution in an inert atmosphere of CO2?
Answer:
Phosphine is formed.
P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2O → PH3 + 3NaH2PO2 sodium hypophosphite

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 12.
Write a balanced equation for the hydrolytic reaction of PCl5 in Heavy water ?
Answer:
PCl5 + 4D2O → D3PO4 + 5DCl

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Question 1.
Prove that sin-1\(\frac{4}{5}\) + sin-1\(\frac{7}{25}\) = sin-1\(\frac{117}{125}\). [Mar. ’16(TS), ’13]
Answer:
Let sin-1\(\frac{4}{5}\) = A and sin-1\(\frac{7}{25}\) = B
Then sin A = \(\frac{4}{5}\) and sin B = \(\frac{7}{25}\)
∴ cos A = \(\frac{3}{5}\) and cos B = \(\frac{24}{25}\)
∴ sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 1

Question 2.
Prove that sin-1\(\frac{3}{5}\) + sin-1\(\frac{8}{17}\) = cos-1\(\frac{36}{85}\). [Mar. ’19(TS); May ’12, ’09]
Answer:
Let sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 2
sin A = \(\frac{3}{5}\);
cot A = \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Let sin-1\(\left(\frac{8}{17}\right)\) = B
sin B = \(\frac{8}{17}\);
cos B = \(\frac{15}{17}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 3
Let cos-1\(\left(\frac{36}{85}\right)\) = C
cos C = \(\frac{36}{85}\)
∴ A + B = C
cos (A + B) = cos C
L.H.S = cos (A + B) = cos A cos B – sin A sin B
= \(\frac{4}{5} \cdot \frac{15}{17}-\frac{3}{5} \cdot \frac{8}{17}=\frac{60}{85}-\frac{24}{85}=\frac{36}{85}\)
= RHS
∴ sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\) + sin-1\(\left(\frac{8}{17}\right)\) = cos-1\(\left(\frac{36}{85}\right)\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Question 3.
Prove that cos-1\(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\) + sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{\sqrt{34}}\right)\) = tan-1\(\left(\frac{27}{11}\right)\). [May ’13]
Answer:
Let cos-1\(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\) = A and sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{\sqrt{34}}\right)\) = B
Then cos A = \(\frac{4}{5}\) and
sin B = \(\left(\frac{3}{\sqrt{34}}\right)\)

tan A = \(\sqrt{\sec ^2 A-1}=\sqrt{\frac{25}{16}-1}\)
= \(\frac{3}{4}\)
and
cos2B
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 4

Question 4.
Find the value of
tan \(\left(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)+\cos ^{-1}\left(\frac{5}{\sqrt{34}}\right)\right)\). [Mar. ’13]
Answer:
Let sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\) = A and
cos-1\(\left(\frac{5}{\sqrt{34}}\right)\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 5

Question 5.
Find the value of cos(sin-1\(\frac{3}{5}\) + sin-1\(\frac{5}{13}\)).
Answer:
Let sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\) = A and sin-1\(\left(\frac{5}{13}\right)\) = B then
sin A = \(\frac{3}{5}\) and sin B = \(\frac{5}{13}\)

∴ cos A = \(\frac{4}{5}\) and
cos B = \(\frac{12}{13}\)

∴ cos (A + B) = cos A cos B – sin A sin B
= \(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\left(\frac{12}{13}\right)-\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\left(\frac{5}{13}\right)\)
= \(\frac{33}{65}\)

Question 6.
Prove that tan-1\(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)\) + tan-1\(\left(\frac{1}{5}\right)\) + tan-1\(\left(\frac{1}{4}\right)\) = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\). [Mar. ’18(TS); Mar. ’19, ’17, ’15 (AP), May ’15(AP); May ’11, ’10, ’06, ’03; Mar. ’11]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 6

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Question 7.
Find the value of tan(cos-1\(\frac{4}{5}\) + tan-1\(\frac{2}{3}\)). [Mar. ’12]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 7

Question 8.
Prove that 2sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\) – cos-1\(\left(\frac{5}{13}\right)\) = cos-1\(\left(\frac{323}{325}\right)\). [May, ’14; Mar. ’14, ’08]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 8

Question 9.
Prove that sin-1\(\frac{4}{5}\) + 2tan-1\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\). [Mar. ’10, Mar. ’15(TS)]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 9

Question 10.
Show that cot (sin-1\(\sqrt{\frac{13}{17}}\)) = sin(tan-1\(\left(\frac{2}{3}\right)\))). [Mar. ’17(TS); May ’97]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 10

Question 11.
Prove that
cos(2stan-1\(\frac{1}{7}\)) = sin(3tan-1\(\frac{3}{4}\)). [B.P]
Answer:
L.H.S = cos(2stan-1\(\frac{1}{7}\))
Let tan-1\(\frac{1}{7}\) = A
⇒ tan A = \(\frac{1}{7}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 11

Question 12.
Prove that [Mar. ’04]
sin[cot-1\(\left(\frac{2 x}{1-x^2}\right)\) + cos-1\(\left(\frac{1-x^2}{1+x^2}\right)\)] = 1
Answer:
Put x = tan θ then
= sin[cot-1\(\left(\frac{2 \tan \theta}{1-\tan ^2 \theta}\right)\) + cos-1\(\left(\frac{1-\tan ^2 \theta}{1+\tan ^2 \theta}\right)\)]
= sin[cot-1(tan 2θ) + cos-1(cos 2θ)]
= sin[cot-1(cot(\(\frac{\pi}{2}\) – 2θ)) + cos-1(cos 2θ)]
= sin[\(\frac{\pi}{2}\) – 2θ + 2θ] = sin\(\frac{\pi}{2}\) = 1 = R.H.S

Question 13.
If cos-1p + cos-1q + cos-1r = π then prove that p2 + q2 + r2 + 2pqr = 1. [Mar ’04; Mar. ’01, ’99]
Answer:
Given cos-1p + cos-1q + cos-1r = π
Let cos-1p = A ⇒ cos A = p
Let cos-1q = B ⇒ cos B = q
Let cos-1r = C ⇒ cos C = r
A + B + C = π ⇒ A + B = π – C
cos(A + B) = cos (π – C)
⇒ cos A. cos B – sin A . sin B = – cos C
cos A cos B – \(\sqrt{1-\cos ^2 \mathrm{~A}} \cdot \sqrt{1-\cos ^2 \mathrm{~B}}\) = -cos C
pq – \(\sqrt{1-p^2} \sqrt{1-q^2}\) = -r
pq + r = \(\sqrt{1-p^2} \sqrt{1-q^2}\)

Squaring on both sides
(pq + r)2 = (1 – p2)(1 – q2)
p2q2 + r2 + 2pqr = 1 – q2 – p2 + p2q2
∴ p2 + q2 + r2 + 2pqr = 1.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Question 14.
If sin-1\(\left(\frac{2 p}{1+p^2}\right)\) – cos-1\(\left(\frac{1-q^2}{1+q^2}\right)\) = tan-1\(\left(\frac{2 x}{1-x^2}\right)\) then prove that x = \(\frac{\mathbf{p}-\mathbf{q}}{1+\mathbf{p q}}\). [May ’98]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 12

Question 15.
If sin-1x + sin-1y + sin-1z = π, then prove that x\(\sqrt{1-x^2}\) + y\(\sqrt{1-y^2}\) + z\(\sqrt{1-z^2}\) = 2xyz. [Mar. ’06; May ’05, ’97]
Answer:
Given sin-1x + sin-1y + sin-1z = π
Let sin-1x = A ⇒ sin A = x
sin-1y = B ⇒ sin B = y
sin-1z = C ⇒ sin C = z
∴ A + B + C = π
= 2sin\(\left(\frac{2 \mathrm{~A}+2 \mathrm{~B}}{2}\right)\) cos\(\left(\frac{2 \mathrm{~A}-2 \mathrm{~B}}{2}\right)\) + sin 2C

= 2 sin (A + B) cos (A – B) + sin 2C
= 2 sin (π – C) cos (A – B) + sin 2C
= 2 sin C cos (A – B) + 2 sin C cos C
= 2 sin C [cos (A – B) + cos C]
= 2 sin C [cos(A – B) + cos (π – (A + B))]
= 2 sin C [cos (A – B) – cos (A + B)]
= 2 sin C (2 sin A. sin B)
= 4 sin A sin B sin C
∴ sin 2A + sin 2B + sin 2C = 4 sin A sin B sin C
⇒ 2 sin A cos A + 2 sin B cos B + 2 sin C cos C = 4 sin A sin B sin C
⇒ sin A cos A + sin B cos B + sin C cos C = 2 sin A sin B sin C
⇒ sin\(\sqrt{1-\sin ^2 \mathrm{~A}}\) + sin B\(\sqrt{1-\sin ^2 \mathrm{~B}}\) + sin C\(\sqrt{1-\sin ^2 \mathrm{~C}}\) = 2sin A sin B sin C
∴ x\(\sqrt{1-x^2}\) + y\(\sqrt{1-y^2}\) + z\(\sqrt{1-z^2}\) = 2xyz

Question 16.
If tan-1x + tan-1y + tan-1z = π, then prove that x + y + z = xyz. [Mar. ’03]
Answer:
Given tan-1x + tan-1y + tan-1z = π
Let tan-1x = A ⇒ tan A = x
Let tan-1y = B ⇒ tan B = y
Let tan-1z = C ⇒ tan B = y
∴ A + B + C = π ⇒ A + B = π – C
tan (A + B) = tan(π – C) ⇒ \(\frac{\tan A+\tan B}{1-\tan A \tan B}\)
= -tan C
\(\frac{x+y}{1-x y}\) = -z ⇒ x + y = -z + xyz
∴ x + y + z = xyz

Question 17.
Solve tan-1\(\left(\frac{x-1}{x-2}\right)\) + tan-1\(\left(\frac{x+1}{x+2}\right)=\frac{\pi}{4}\).
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 13

Question 18.
Solve 3sin-1\(\left(\frac{2 x}{1+x^2}\right)\) – 4cos-1\(\left(\frac{1-x^2}{1+x^2}\right)\) + 2tan-1\(\left(\frac{2 x}{1-x^2}\right)=\frac{\pi}{3}\). [Mar. ’09]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 14
3sin-1(sin 2θ) – 4cos-1(cos 2θ) + 2tan-1(tan 2θ) = \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)
3(2θ) – 4(2θ) + 2(2θ) = \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)
⇒ 6θ – 8θ + 4θ = \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)
2θ = \(\frac{\pi}{3}\) ⇒ θ = \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
⇒ tan θ = tan \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
∴ x = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Some More Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Question 1.
Prove that sin-1\(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\) + sin-1\(\left(\frac{5}{13}\right)\) + sin-1\(\left(\frac{16}{65}\right)=\frac{\pi}{2}\). [Mar ’18(AP)]
Answer:
Let sin-1\(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\) = A and sin-1\(\left(\frac{5}{13}\right)\) = B
∴ sin A = \(\frac{4}{5}\) and sin B = \(\frac{5}{13}\)
∴ cos A = \(\frac{3}{5}\) and cos B = \(\frac{12}{13}\)

Also cos (α + β) = cos α cos β – sin α sin β
= \(\frac{3}{5} \cdot \frac{12}{13}-\frac{4}{5} \cdot \frac{5}{13}=\frac{16}{65}\)
∴ α + β = cos-1\(\left(\frac{16}{65}\right)\) ⇒ sin-1\(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\) + sin-1\(\left(\frac{5}{13}\right)\) = cos-1\(\left(\frac{16}{65}\right)\)

L.H.S = sin-1\(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\) + sin-1\(\left(\frac{5}{13}\right)\) + sin-1\(\left(\frac{16}{65}\right)\) = cos-1\(\left(\frac{16}{65}\right)\) + sin-1\(\left(\frac{16}{65}\right)\) = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Question 2.
Prove that cot-19 + cosec-1\(\frac{\sqrt{41}}{4}=\frac{\pi}{4}\).
Answer:
Let cot-19 = α
Let cosec-1\(\frac{\sqrt{41}}{4}\) = β
⇒ cot α = 9 ⇒ cosec β = \(\frac{\sqrt{41}}{4}\)
⇒ tan α = \(\frac{1}{9}\) ⇒ tan β = \(\frac{4}{5}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 15
From the figure
Take tan (α + β) = \(\frac{\tan \alpha+\tan \beta}{1-\tan \alpha \cdot \tan \beta}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 16

Question 3.
Prove that sin-1\(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\) + 2tan-1\(\left(\frac{1}{3}\right)=\frac{\pi}{2}\)
Answer:
Let sin-1\(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\) = A then sin A = \(\frac{4}{5}\) and
tan-1\(\left(\frac{1}{3}\right)\) = B then tan B = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 17

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Question 4.
If cos-1\(\frac{p}{a}\) + cos-1\(\frac{q}{b}\) = α, then prove that \(\frac{p^2}{a^2}-\frac{2 p q}{a b}\)cos α + \(\frac{q^2}{b^2}\) = sin2α
Answer:
Given cos-1\(\frac{p}{a}\) + cos-1\(\frac{q}{b}\) = α
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 18
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 19

Question 5.
Solve sin-1\(\left(\frac{5}{x}\right)\) + sin-1\(\left(\frac{12}{x}\right)=\frac{\pi}{2}\), (x > 0)
Answer:
Let sin-1\(\left(\frac{5}{x}\right)\) = A and sin-1\(\left(\frac{12}{x}\right)\) = B then
sin A = \(\frac{5}{x}\) and sin B = \(\frac{12}{x}\)(x > 0)
∴ Now α + β = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) ⇒ sin α = sin(\(\frac{\pi}{2}\) – β)
= cos β ⇒ \(\frac{5}{x}=\sqrt{1-\frac{144}{x^2}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{25}{x^2}=1-\frac{144}{x^2} \Rightarrow \frac{169}{x^2}\) = 1 ⇒ x2 = 169
⇒ x = ±13 But x = 13(∵ x > 0)

Question 6.
Prove that sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\) + cos-1\(\left(\frac{12}{13}\right)\) = cos-1\(\left(\frac{33}{65}\right)\).
Answer:
Let sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\) = A and cos-1\(\left(\frac{12}{13}\right)\) = B then
A + B ∈ (0, π)
∴ sin A = \(\frac{3}{5}\) and cos B = \(\frac{12}{13}\)
cos A = \(\frac{4}{5}\) and sin B = \(\frac{5}{13}\)

Consider cos(A + B) = cos A cos B – sin A sin B
= \(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\left(\frac{12}{13}\right)-\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\left(\frac{5}{13}\right)=\frac{48}{65}-\frac{15}{65}=\frac{33}{65}\)
A + B = cos-1\(\left(\frac{33}{65}\right)\)
⇒ sin-1\(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\) + cos-1\(\left(\frac{12}{13}\right)\) = cos-1\(\left(\frac{33}{65}\right)\)

Question 7.
Find the values of sin(cos-1\(\frac{3}{5}\) + cos-1\(\frac{12}{13}\)).
Answer:
Let cos-1\(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\) = A and cos-1\(\left(\frac{12}{13}\right)\) = B then
cos A = \(\frac{3}{5}\) and cos B = \(\frac{12}{13}\)
∴ sin A = \(\frac{4}{5}\) and sin B = \(\frac{5}{13}\)
∴ sin(A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B
= \(\left(\frac{4}{5}\right)\left(\frac{12}{13}\right)+\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\left(\frac{5}{13}\right)=\frac{63}{65}\)
∴ sin(cos-1\(\frac{3}{5}\) + cos-1\(\frac{12}{13}\))

Question 8.
Prove that cos(2tan-1\(\frac{1}{7}\)) = sin(2tan-1\(\frac{3}{4}\))
Answer:
Let α = tan-1(\(\frac{1}{7}\)) then tan α = \(\frac{1}{7}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 20

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Question 9.
Prove that tan-1\(\frac{1}{7}\) + tan-1\(\frac{1}{13}\) – tan-1\(\frac{2}{9}\) = 0
Answer:
L.H.S = (tan-1\(\frac{1}{7}\) + tan-1\(\frac{1}{13}\)) – tan-1\(\frac{2}{9}\)
[we have x > 0, y > 0, xy > 1 then tan-1x + tan-1y + tan-1z = tan-1\(\left(\frac{x+y}{1-x y}\right)\)]
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 21

Question 10.
Prove that tan-1\(\frac{3}{4}\) + tan-1\(\frac{3}{5}\) – tan-1\(\frac{8}{19}\) = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
Answer:
LHS = tan-1\(\frac{3}{4}\) + tan-1\(\frac{3}{5}\) – tan-1\(\frac{8}{19}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 22

Question 11.
Show that tan-1\(\frac{1}{7}\) + tan-1\(\frac{1}{8}\) = cot-1\(\frac{201}{43}\) + cot-118.
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 23

Question 12.
Show that sec2 (tan-12) + cosec2 (cot-12) = 10.
Answer:
Let a = tan-12 ⇒ tan α = 2
sec2α = 1 + tan2α = 1 + 4 = 5
Let β = cot-12 ⇒ cot β = 2
∴ cosec2β = 1 + cot2β = 1 + 4 = 5
∴ sec2 (tan-12) + cosec2 (cot-12)
= sec2α + cosec2β = 5 + 5 = 10

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions

Question 13.
If α = tan-1\(\left[\frac{\sqrt{1+x^2}-\sqrt{1-x^2}}{\sqrt{1+x^2}+\sqrt{1-x^2}}\right]\), then prove that x2 = sin 2α.
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 24

Question 14.
If tan-1x + tan-1y + tan-1z = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\), prove that xy + yz + zx = 1.
Answer:
Given tan-1x + tan-1y + tan-1z = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
tan-1x + tan-1y = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) – tan-1z
tan-1\(\left[\frac{x+y}{1-x y}\right]\) = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) – tan-1z
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Inverse Trigonometric Functions Important Questions 25
⇒ (x + y)z = 1 – xy
⇒ xz + yz = 1 – xy
⇒ xy + yz + zx = 1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Students must practice these Maths 2A Important Questions TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
State and prove Binomial Theorem. [March ’09]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 2

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 3

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 2.
Find the numerically greatest term in the expansion of (4 + 3x)15 where x = \(\frac{7}{2}\).
Solution:
Given
(4 + 3x)15
⇒ 415 (1 + \(\frac{3 x}{4}\))15 = 415 (1 + x)n
where n = 15; x = \(\frac{3 x}{4}\)
\(|x|=\left|\frac{3 x}{4}\right|=\left|\frac{3}{4} \cdot \frac{7}{2}\right|=\frac{21}{8}\)
Now, \(\frac{(n+1)|x|}{|x|+1}=\frac{(15+1)\left|\frac{3 x}{4}\right|}{\left|\frac{3 x}{4}\right|+1}\)
= \(\frac{16 \cdot \frac{21}{8}}{\frac{21}{8}+1}=\frac{336}{29}\) = 11.5
∴ T12 is numerically greatest.
r + 1 = 12
⇒ r = 11
The general term in the expansion of (x + a)n is
Tr + 1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn – r ar
T11 + 1 = \({ }^{15} \mathrm{C}_{11}\) (4)15 – 11 (3x)11
12th term in this expansion is

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 4

Question 3.
Find the numerically reatest tenu in the expansion of (4a – 6b)13 when a = 3, b = 5.
Solution:
Given (4a – 6b)13 = (4a)13 (1 – \(\frac{6 b}{4 a}\))13
= (4a)13 (1 + x)n
where, x = \(-\frac{6 b}{4 a}\), n = 13
|x| = \(\left|\frac{-6 b}{4 a}\right|=\left|\frac{-6 \cdot 5}{4 \cdot 3}\right|=\frac{5}{2}\)
Now, \(\frac{(n+1)|x|}{|x|+1}=\frac{(13+1) \frac{5}{2}}{\frac{5}{2}+1}\)
= \(\frac{14 \cdot 5}{5+2}=\frac{70}{7}\) = 10
∴ T10 and T11 are numerically greatest.
T10:
r + 1 = 10
⇒ r = 9
The general term in the expansion of (1 + x)n is
Tr + 1 = \({ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) xn – r ar
T10 in this expansion is
T9+1 = \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_9\) (4a)13-9 (- 6b)9
T10 = \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_9\) (4a)4 (- 6b)9
= \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_9\) (44 . 34) ((- 6)9 (5)9)
= \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_9\) 124 . 309
|T10| = \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_9\) 124 . 309

T11:
r + 1 = 11
⇒ r = 10.
The general term in the expansion of (1 – x)n is
Tr + 1 = \({ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) xn – r ar
T11 in this expansion is
T10+1 = \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_{10}\) (4a)13-10 . (- 6b)10
= \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_{10}\) (4a)3 (6b)10
T11 = \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_{10}\) (4 . 3)3 (6 . 5)10
= \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_{10}\) 123 . 3010
T11 = \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_{10}\) 123 . 3010
∴ |T10| = |T11|.

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 4.
If the coefficient of x10 in the expansion of \(\left(a x^2+\frac{1}{b x}\right)^{11}\) is equal to the coefficient of x-10 in the expansion of \(\left(a x-\frac{1}{b x^2}\right)^{11}\) find the relation between a and b where a and b are real numbers. [AP – May 2015, AP – Mar. 2019]
Solution:
Case – I :
Given \(\left(a x^2+\frac{1}{b x}\right)^{11}\)
Here x = ax2, a = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{bx}}\); n = 11
Now, the general term in the expansion is
Tr+1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
= \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) a11-r x22-2r 1r b-r x-r
= \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) a11-r b-r x22-3r …………….(1)
To find the coefficient of x10,
Put 22 – 3r = 10
3r = 12
r = 4
Substituting r = 4 in equation (1) we get
T4+1 = \({ }^{11} C_4\) a11-4 b-4 x22-12
T5 = \({ }^{11} C_4\) a7 b-4 x10
T5 = \({ }^{11} C_4\) a7 b-4 x10
∴ The coeff. of x10 ¡n the expansion of \(\left(a x^2+\frac{1}{b x}\right)^{11}\) is \({ }^{11} C_4\) a7 b-4

Case II:
Given \(\left(a x-\frac{1}{b x^2}\right)^{11}\)
Here x = ax, a = \(\left(\frac{-1}{b x^2}\right)\), n = 11
Now, the general term in the expansion is
Tr + 1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
= \({ }^{11} C_r(a x)^{11-r}\left(\frac{-1}{b x^2}\right)^r\)
= \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) a11-r x11-r (- 1)r b-r x-2r
= \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) (- 1)r b-r x11-3r ……………(2)
To find the coefficient of x-10
put 11 – 3r = – 10
⇒ 3r = 21
⇒ r = 7
Substitute r = 7 in equation (2) we get
T7+1 = \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_7\) a11-7 b7 (- 1)7 x11-21
T8 = – \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_7\) a4 b-7 x-10
∴ The coeff. of x-10 in the expansion of \(\left(a x-\frac{1}{b x^2}\right)^{11}\) is – \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_7\) a4 b-7
Given that, these coefficients are equal
\({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_7\) a7 b-4 = – \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_7\) a4 b-7
\({ }^{11} C_4 \frac{a^7}{b^4}=-{ }^{11} C_4 \frac{a^4}{b^7}\)
\(\frac{a^7}{b^4}=\frac{-a^4}{b^7}\)
⇒ a3b3 = – 1
⇒ (ab)3 = (- 1)3
⇒ ab = – 1

Question 5.
If n is a positive integer, then show that
i) C0 + C1 + C2 + ……………… + Cn = 2
ii) C0 + C2 + C4 + ……………. = C1 + C3 + C5 + ……….. = 2n-1 [March ’97, ’90]
Solution:
We know that
(1 + x)n = C0 + C1x + C2x2 + ……………… + Cnxn ………….(1)
i) Put x = 1 in equation (1)
⇒ (1 + 1)n = C0 + C1(1) + C2(1)2 + C3(1)3 + C4(1)4 + ……………… + Cn(1)n
2n = C0 + C1 + C2 + C3 + C4 + …………. + Cn
∴ C0 + C1 + C2 + C3 + C4 + …………. + Cn = 2n

ii) Put x = – 1 in equation (1), we get
(1 – 1)n = C0 + C1 (- 1) + C2 (- 1)2 + C3 (- 1)3 + ……………. + Cn (- 1)n
o = C0 – C1 + C2 – C3 + C4 – ………………
C0 + C2 + C4 + …………………. = C1 + C3 + C5 + ………….
Since a = b
⇒ a = b = \(\frac{a+b}{2}\)
C0 + C2 + C4 + …………………. = C1 + C3 + C5 + ………….
= \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_0+\mathrm{C}_2+\mathrm{C}_4+\ldots \ldots+\mathrm{C}_1+\mathrm{C}_3+\mathrm{C}_5+\ldots \ldots}{2}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_0+\mathrm{C}_1+\mathrm{C}_2+\mathrm{C}_3+\mathrm{C}_4+\mathrm{C}_5+\ldots \ldots}{2}\)
= \(\frac{2^{\mathrm{n}}}{2}\)
= 2n – 1
∴ C0 + C2 + C4 + …………………. = C1 + C3 + C5 + …………. = 2n – 1
C0 + C2 + C4 + …………………. = 2n – 1
C1 + C3 + C5 + …………………… = 2n – 1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 6.
Prove that for any real numbers a, d, a . C0 + (a + d) . C1 + (a + 2d) . C2 + ……………… + (a + nd) . Cn = (2a + nd) 2n – 1 [May ‘98]
Solution:
Let S = a . C0 + (a + d) . C1 + (a + 2d) . C2 + ……………… + (a + nd) . Cn ………………(1)
By writing the terms in R.H.S of (1) in reverse order has done we get
S = (a + nd)Cn + (a + (n – 1)d)Cn-1 + (a + (n-2)d)Cn-2 + …………. + aC0
S = (a + nd)C0 + (a + (n – 1)d)C1 + (a + (2n – 2)d)C2 + ………….. + aCn ……………(2)
Adding (1) and (2) we get

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 5

2s = (2a + nd) (C0 + C1 + C2 + …………. + Cn)
2s = (2a + nd)2n
⇒ S = (2a + nd)2n-1
∴ aC0 + (a + d)C1 + (a + 2d)C2 + …………. + (a + nd)Cn = (2a + nd) 22n-1.

Question 7.
For r = 0, 1, 2, ….., n, prove that C0 . Cr + C1 . Cr+1 + C2 . Cr+2 + ……………… + Cn-r . Cn = \({ }^{2 n} C_{(n+r)}\)
and hence deduce that
i) C02 + C12 + C22 + ………….. + Cn2 = \({ }^{2 n} C_n\)
ii) C0 . C1 + C1 . C2 + C2 . C3 + ………… + Cn-1 . Cn = \({ }^{2 n} C_{n+1}\)
[May ‘97, 95, ‘90, ‘94,’93, ‘92; March ‘98, ‘93, AP-Mar. 2018; TS – Mar. 2015]
Solution:
We know that
(1 + x)n = C0 + C1 . x + C2 . x2 + ………………….. + Cr xr + Cn . xn ………………(1)
(x + 1)n = C0xn + C1xn-1 + C2xn-2 + ………………… + Crxn-r + …………………. + Cn ………………(2)
Multiplying (2) and (1), we get
(C0xn + C1xn-1 + C2xn-2 + ………………… + Crxn-r + …………………. + Cn) (C0 + C1 . x + C2 . x2 + ………………….. + Cr xr + Cn . xn)
= (x + 1)n (1 + x)n = (1 + x)2n
Comparing the coefficient of xn+r on bothsides we get,
C0 . Cr + C1 . Cr+1 + C2 . Cr+2 + ……………… + Cn-r . Cn = \({ }^{2 n} C_{(n+r)}\) ……………….(3)

i) On substituting r = 0 in equation (3) we get
C0 . C0 + C1 . C1 + C2 . C2 + ……………….. + Cn . Cn = \({ }^{2 n} C_n\)
C02 + C12 + C22 + ………….. + Cn2 = \({ }^{2 n} C_n\)

ii) On substituting, r = 1 in equation (3) we get
C0 . C1 + C1 . C2 + C2 . C3 + ………… + Cn-1 . Cn = \({ }^{2 n} C_{n+1}\)

Question 8.
If n is a positive integer and x is any non-zero real number, then prove that
C0 + C1 . \(\frac{x}{2}\) + C2 . \(\frac{x^2}{3}\) + C3 . \(\frac{x^3}{4}\) + …………….. + Cn . \(\frac{\mathbf{x}^n}{n+1}\) = \(\frac{(1+x)^{n+1}-1}{(n+1) x}\). [May ’14, ’13, ’08, ’05, Mar. ’14, ’02, Board Paper, AP – May 2016]
Solution:
Let S = C0 + C1 . \(\frac{x}{2}\) + C2 . \(\frac{x^2}{3}\) + C3 . \(\frac{x^3}{4}\) + …………….. + Cn . \(\frac{\mathbf{x}^n}{n+1}\) = \(\frac{(1+x)^{n+1}-1}{(n+1) x}\)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 6

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 7

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 9.
If n is a positive integer, then prove that
C0 + \(\frac{C_1}{2}+\frac{C_2}{3}+\ldots .+\frac{C_n}{n+1}=\frac{2^{n+1}-1}{n+1}\) [TS – Mar. 2017]
Solution:
Let S = C0 + \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_1}{2}+\frac{\mathrm{C}_2}{3}+\ldots . .+\frac{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{n}}}{\mathrm{n}+1}\)
= \({ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_0+\frac{1}{2} \cdot{ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_1+\frac{1}{3} \cdot{ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_2+\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}+1} \cdot{ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{n}}\)
Now multiplying on both sides with (n + 1), we get

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 8

Question 10.
Prove that \(\frac{C_1}{2}+\frac{C_3}{4}+\frac{C_5}{6}+\frac{C_7}{8}+\cdots \cdots=\frac{2^n-1}{n+1}\) [May 08].
Solution:

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 9

Question 11.
If (1 + x + x2)n = a0 + a1x + a2x2 + ……………… + a2nx2n, then prove that
i) a0 + a1 + a2 + …………….. + a2n = 3n
ii) a0 + a2 + a4 + ……………. + a2n = \(\frac{3^n+1}{2}\)
iii) a1 + a3 + a5 + ……………… + a2n = \(\frac{3^n-1}{2}\)
iv) a0 + a3 + a6 + a9 + ………………. = 3n-1 [TS May 2016; Board Paper]
Solution:
(1 + x + x2)n = a0 + a1x + a2x2 + ……………… + a2nx2n
Put x = 1 in equation (1) we get,
(1 + 1 + 12)n = a0 + a1 (1) + a2 (1)2 + ……………… + a2n. (1)2n
a0 + a1 + a2 + …………… + a2n = 3n ……………(2)
Put x = – 1 in equation (1) we get,
(1 – 1 + 12)n = a0 + a1 (- 1) + a2 (- )2 + a3. (- 1)4 ……………… + a2n. (- 1)2n
a0 – a1 + a2 – a3 + a4 + …………… + a2n = 1 ……………(3)
i) From (2),
a0 + a1 + a2 + a3 + …………… + a2n = 3n

ii) Now, adding (2) and (3)
a0 + a1 + a2 + a3 + …………… + a2n = 3n

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 10

iii) Now, subtracting (2) and (3)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 11

iv) Put, x = 1 in equation (1) we get
(1 + 1 + 12)n = a0 + a1 (1) + a2(1)2 + a3 (1)3 + a4 (1)4 + a5 (1)5 + a6 (1)6 + ……………… + a2n (1)2n
= a0 + a1 + a2 + a3 + a4 + a5 + a6 + …………….. + a2n = 3n ………………(4)

Put x = ω in equation (1), we get
(1 + ω + ω2)n = a0 + a1 (ω) + a2 (ω)2 + a3 (ω)3 + a4 (ω)4 + a5 (ω)5+ a6 (ω)6 + ……………. + a2n (ω)2n
= a0 + a1 . (ω) + a2 (ω)2 + a3 (ω)3 + a4 (ω)4 + a5 (ω)5 + a6 (ω)6 + ……………. + a2n (ω)2n = 0 …………….(5)
put x = in equation (1) we get,
(1 + ω2 + ω4)n = a0 + a1 . (ω)2 + a2 (ω)4 + a3 (ω)6 + a4 (ω)8 + a5 (ω)10 + a6 (ω)12 + ……………. + a2n2)2n
= a0 + a1 . ω2 + a2 ω + a3 + a4 ω2 + a5 ω + a6 + ……………. + a2n2)2n = 0
Now, adding (4), (5) and (6)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 12

⇒ 3a0 + 0 + 0 + 3a3 + 0 + 0 + 3a6 + ………….. = 3n
⇒ 3(a0 + a3 + a6 + ………………..) = 3n
⇒ a0 + a3 + a6 + ……………….. = 3n-1.

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 12.
If (1 + x + x2 + x3)7 = b0 + b1x + b2x2 + ………………. + b21x21, then find the value of
i) b0 + b2 + b4 + …………. + b20
ii) b1 + b3 + b5 + …………….. + b21
Solution:
Given
(1 + x + x2 + x3)7 = b0 + b1x + b2x2 + ………………. + b21x21 …………………….(1)
Substituting x = 1 in (1),
we get b0 + b1 + b2 + …………. + b21 = 47 ………………(2)
Substituting x = – 1 in (1),
we get b0 – b1 + b2 + ……………… – b21 = 0 ……………..(3)
i) (2) + (3)
⇒ 2b0 + 2b2 + 2b4 + ………………….. + 2b90 = 47
⇒ b0 + b2 + b4 + …………….. + b20 = 213

ii) (2) – (3)
⇒ 2b1 + 2b3 + 2b5 + ……………. + 2b21 = 47
⇒ b1 + b3 + b5 + ……………. + b21 = 213

Question 13.
the coefficients of x9, x10, x11 in the expansion of (1 + x)n are in A.P., then prove that n2 – 41n + 398 = 0.
Solution:
Coefficient of r in the expansion of (1 + x)n is \({ }^n C_r\).
Given coefficients of x9, x10, x11 in the expansion of (1 + x)n are \({ }^n C_9,{ }^n C_{10},{ }^n C_{11}\) in AP., then 2\(\left({ }^n C_{10}\right)={ }^n C_9+{ }^n C_{11}\)
⇒ \(2 \frac{n !}{(n-10) ! 10 !}=\frac{n !}{(n-9) ! 9 !}+\frac{n !}{(n-11) !+11 !}\)
⇒ \(\frac{2}{10(n-10)}=\frac{1}{(n-9)(n-10)}+\frac{1}{11 \times 10}\)
⇒ \(\frac{2}{(n-10) 10}=\frac{110+(n-9)(n-10)}{110(n-9)(n-10)}\)
⇒ 22 (n – 9) = 110 + n2 – 19n + 90
⇒ n2 – 41n + 398 = 0.

Question 14.
1f 36, 84, 126 are three successive binomial coefficlenü* in the expansion of (1 + x)n, then find n. [May ’09, ’06] [TS – Mar. 2019]
Solution:
We know that
(1 + x)n = C0 + C1x + C2x2 + ………………. Cnxn.
Let the three successive binomial coefficients in the expansion of (1 + x)n are \({ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}-1},{ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}},{ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}+1}\)
Given that,
\({ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}-1}\) = 36 ………………(1)
\({ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) = 84 ………………(2)
\({ }^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}+1}\) = 126 ……………..(3)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 13

⇒ 2n – 2r = 3r + 3
⇒ 5r = 2n – 3 from (4)
⇒ 5 \(\left(\frac{3 n+3}{10}\right)\) = 2n – 3
⇒ 3n + 3 = 4n – 6
⇒ n = 9.

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 15.
If the 2nd, 3rd and 4th terms in the expansion of (a + x)n are respectively 240, 720, 1080, find a, x, n. [TS – Mar. 2016; Ma ‘09, ’06]
Solution:
The general term in the expansion of (x + a)n is
Tr+1 = xn-r . ar
In the expansion, (a + x)n
T2 = T1+1
= \({ }^n C_1\) (a)n-1 x1 = 240 …………..(1)
T3 = T2+1
= \({ }^n C_2\) (a)n-2 x2 = 720 …………..(2)
T4 = T3+1
= \({ }^n C_3\) (a)n-3 x3 = 1080 …………..(3)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 14

⇒ 2(n – 2) x = 9a ………………(5)
\(\frac{(5)}{(4)}=\frac{2(n-2) x}{(n-1) x}=\frac{9 a}{6 a}\)
⇒ 4(n – 2) = 3(n – 1)
⇒ 4n – 8 = 3n – 3
⇒ n = 5
Substitute n = 5 in equation (4)
⇒ (5 – 1)x = 6a
⇒ 4x = 6a
⇒ 2x = 3a
⇒ x = \(\frac{3 a}{2}\)
Substitute n, x in equation (1).
\(5 C_1(a)^{5-1}\left(\frac{3 a}{2}\right)^1\) = 240
⇒ 5 . a4 . \(\frac{3}{2}\) . a = 240
⇒ a5 = 32
⇒ a = 2.
x = \(\frac{3 a}{2}\)
x = 3 . \(\frac{2}{2}\)
⇒ x = 3
∴ a = 2, x = 3, n = 5.

Question 16.
If the coefficients of rth, (r + 1)th and (r + 2)nd tenus in the expansion of (1 + x)n are in A.P then show that n2 – (4r + 1) n + 4r2 – 2 = 0.
Solution:
In the expansion (1 + x)n
The coeff. of Tr = \({ }^n \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}-1}\);
The coeff. of Tr+1 = \({ }^n C_r\)
The coeÍf. of Tr+2 = \({ }^n \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}+1}\)
Given that
\({ }^n \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}-1}\), \({ }^n C_r\), \({ }^n \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}+1}\) are in AP.
If a, b, c are in A.P.
Then 2b = a + c

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 16

2(n – r + 1) (r + 1) = (r + 1) r + (n – r + 1) (n – r)
⇒ 2nr + 2n – 2r2 – 2r + 2r + 2 = r2 + r + n2 – nr – nr + r2 + n – r
⇒ 2nr + 2n – 2r2 + 2 = n2 – 2nr + n + 2r2
⇒ n2 – 2nr + n + 2r2 – 2nr – 2n + 2r2 – 2 = 0
⇒ n2 – 4nr + 4r2 – n – 2 = 0
⇒ n2 – (4r + 1)n + 4r2 – 2 = 0.

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 17.
If ‘P’ and ‘Q’ are the sum of odd tenns and the sum of even terms respectively in the expansion of (x + a)n then prove that
i) P2 – Q2 = (x2 – a2)n
ii) 4PQ = (x + a)2n – (x – a)2n [AP – March 2016, March ’10]
Solution:
Since P and Q are the sum of odd terms and sum of even terms respectively in the expansion of (x + a)n.
Now (x + a)n =
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 17

i) L.HS: P2 – Q2
= (P + Q) (P – Q) = (x + a) (x – a)
= [(x + a) (x – a)]n
= (x2 – a2)n = R.H.S.

ii) L.H.S : 4PQ = (P + Q)2 – (P – Q)2
= ((x + a)n)2 – ((x – a)n)2
= (x + a)2n – (x – a)2n = R.H.S.
∴ 4PQ = (x + a)2n – (x – a)2n.

Question 18.
If the coefficients of 4 consecutive term in the expansion of (1 + x)n are a1, a2, a3, a4 respectively then show that \(\frac{a_1}{a_1+a_2}+\frac{a_3}{a_3+a_4}=\frac{2 a_2}{a_2+a_3}\). [AP – Mar. 2017; May’11. ‘07, March ’11, ’95].
Solution:
Since a1, a2, a3, a4, are the coefficients of 4 consecutive terms in the expansion of (1 + x)n
Let a1 = \({ }^n C_{r-1}\),
a2 = \({ }^n C_r\),
a3 = \({ }^n C_{r+1}\),
a4 = \({ }^n C_{r+2}\)
L.H.S:

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 18

R.H.S:

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 19

Question 19.
Show that the middle term in the expansion of (1 + x)2n is \(\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5 \ldots \ldots(2 n-1)}{n !}(2 x)^n\).
Solution:
The expansion of (1 + x)2n contains 2n + 1 terms.
∴ Middle term is (n + 1)th term
∴ Tn+1 = \({ }^{2 n} C_n\) xn

= \(\frac{2 n !}{n ! \cdot n !}\) xn

= \(\frac{2 n(2 n-1)(2 n-2)(2 n-3) \ldots . .4 \times 3 \times 2 \times 1}{n ! n !} \cdot x^n\)

= \(\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5 \ldots .(2 n-1) \cdot 2 \times 4 \times 6 \times \ldots .2 n}{n ! n !} \cdot x^n\)

= \(\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5 \ldots .(2 n-1)(1 \times 2 \times 3 \times \ldots \ldots n) 2^n}{n ! n !} \cdot x^n\)

∴ Middle term = \(\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5 \ldots \ldots(2 n-1)}{n !}(2 x)^n\).

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 20.
If (1 + 3x – 2x2)10 = a0 + a1x + a2x2 + ……………. + ax20 then prove that
i) a0 + a1 + a2 + ………….. + a20 = 210
ii) a0 – a1 + a2 – a3 + ……………. + a20 = 410
Solution:
Given
(1 + 3x – 2x2)10 = a0 + a1x + a2x2 + ……………. + ax20 …………….(1)

i) Put x = 1, in (1), we get
(1 + 3 – 2)10 = a0 + a1 + a2 + ………….. + a20
⇒ a0 + a1 + a2 + …………….. + a20 = 210.

ii) Put x = – 1 in (1), we get
(1 – 3 – 2)’°= a0 – a1 + a2 – a3 + ………………. + a20
⇒ a0 – a1 + a2 – a3 + ……………. + a20 = 410.

Question 21.
If n is a positive integer, prove that \(\sum_{r=1}^n r^3 \cdot\left(\frac{{ }^n C_r}{{ }^n C_{r-1}}\right)^2=\frac{n(n+1)^2(n+2)}{12}\). [March ’13]
Solution:
Now, \(\frac{{ }^{n^n} C_r}{{ }^{n_C} C_{r-1}}=\frac{\frac{n !}{(n-r) ! r !}}{\frac{n !}{(n-r+1) !(r-1) !}}\)
= \(\frac{(n-r+1) !(r-1) !}{(n-r) ! r !}\)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 20

Question 22.
Find the sum of the infinite series \(1+\frac{2}{3} \cdot \frac{1}{2}+\frac{2 \cdot 5}{3 \cdot 6}\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^2+\frac{2 \cdot 5 \cdot 8}{3 \cdot 6 \cdot 9}\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^3+\ldots \infty\). [May ’91]
Solution:
Let the given series ¡s
S = 1 + \(\frac{2}{3} \cdot \frac{1}{2}+\frac{2 \cdot 5}{3 \cdot 6} \cdot \frac{1}{2^2}+\frac{2 \cdot 5 \cdot 8}{3 \cdot 6 \cdot 9} \cdot \frac{1}{2^3}+\cdots \cdots\)
Comparing with 1 + nx + \(\frac{n(n-1)}{1 \cdot 2}\) x2 + …………….

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 21

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 23.
\(\frac{3 \cdot 5}{5 \cdot 10}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7 \cdot 9}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15 \cdot 20}+\cdots \cdots \cdots \infty\) [TS – Mar. 2017; May ’09]
Solution:
Let the given series is
S = \(\frac{3 \cdot 5}{5 \cdot 10}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7 \cdot 9}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15 \cdot 20}+\cdots \cdots \cdots \infty\)

S + \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}+\frac{3 \cdot 5}{5 \cdot 10}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7 \cdot 9}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15 \cdot 20}+\ldots \ldots\)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 22

Question 24.
If x = \(\frac{1}{5}+\frac{1 \cdot 3}{5 \cdot 10}+\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15}+\ldots \ldots \cdots \infty\), then find 3x2 + 6x. [TS – Mar. 2016, May ’14, ’11, ’08, Mar. ’14, ’12, ’06, TS – Mar. ’19]
Solution:
Given x = \(\frac{1}{5}+\frac{1 \cdot 3}{5 \cdot 10}+\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15}+\ldots \ldots \ldots\),
x + 1 = 1 + \(\frac{1}{5}+\frac{1 \cdot 3}{5 \cdot 10}+\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15}+\cdots \cdots\)
Now, comparing with

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 23

⇒ x2 + 1 + 2x = \(\frac{5}{3}\)
⇒ 3x2 + 6x + 3 = 5
⇒ 3x2 + 6x = 2.

Question 25.
Find the sum of the infinite series \(\frac{3}{4}+\frac{3 \cdot 5}{4 \cdot 8}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7}{4 \cdot 8 \cdot 12}+\) [May ’10, March 11]
Solution:
Let the given series is
S = \(\frac{3}{4}+\frac{3 \cdot 5}{4 \cdot 8}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7}{4 \cdot 8 \cdot 12}+\ldots \ldots \ldots\)
S + 1 = 1 + \(\frac{3}{4}+\frac{3 \cdot 5}{4 \cdot 8}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7}{4 \cdot 8 \cdot 12}+\ldots \ldots \ldots\)
Now, comparing with

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 24

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 26.
If x = \(\frac{1 \cdot 3}{3 \cdot 6}+\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5}{3 \cdot 6 \cdot 9}+\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7}{3 \cdot 6 \cdot 9 \cdot 12}+\ldots\) then prove that 9x2 + 24x = 11. [AP – MAr. ’19, ’17, ’15, May ’16; TS – MAr. ’18, ’16, Mar. ’09, Board Paper, May ’15]
Solution:
Given

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 25

Question 27.
If x = \(\frac{5}{(2 !) \cdot 3}+\frac{5 \cdot 7}{(3 !) \cdot 3^2}+\frac{5 \cdot 7 \cdot 9}{(4 !) \cdot 3^3}+\ldots\) then find the value of x2 + 4x. [TS – May; March ’13, May ’12]
Solution:
Given,

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 26

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 27

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 28.
Find the sum to infinite terms of the series \(\frac{7}{5}\left(1+\frac{1}{10^2}+\frac{1 \cdot 3}{1 \cdot 2} \cdot \frac{1}{10^4}+\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5}{1 \cdot 2 \cdot 3} \cdot \frac{1}{10^6}+\ldots\right)\). [AP – Mar. ’18, ’16; May ’13, March ’05].
Solution:

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 28

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 29

Question 29.
Show that for any non-zero rational number x.
1 + \(\frac{x}{2}+\frac{x(x-1)}{2 \cdot 4}+\frac{x(x-1)(x-2)}{2 \cdot 4 \cdot 6}+\ldots \ldots\) = 1 + \(\frac{x}{3}+\frac{x(x+1)}{3 \cdot 6}+\frac{x(x+1)(x+2)}{3 \cdot 6 \cdot 9}+\ldots \ldots\) [March ’94]
Solution:
L.H.S = 1 + \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{2}+\frac{\mathrm{n}(\mathrm{n}-1)}{2 \cdot 4}+\frac{\mathrm{n}(\mathrm{n}-1)(\mathrm{n}-2)}{2 \cdot 4 \cdot 6}+\ldots\)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 30

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 31

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Some More Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions

Question 1.
Find the 7th term in the expansion of \(\left(\frac{4}{x^3}+\frac{x^2}{2}\right)^{14}\).
Solution:
Given \(\left(\frac{4}{x^3}+\frac{x^2}{2}\right)^{14}\)
Here, x = \(\frac{4}{x^3}\); a = \(\frac{x^2}{2}\); n = 14
r + 1 = 7
⇒ r = 6
The general term in the expansion of (x + a)n is
Tr+1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
The 7th term in the expansion of \(\left(\frac{4}{x^3}+\frac{x^2}{2}\right)^{14}\)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 32

Question 2.
Find the 5th term in the expansion of (3x – 4y)7.
Solution:
Given (3x – 4y)7
Here, x = 3x; a = – 4y; n = 7
r + 1 = 5
r =4
The general term in the expansion of (x + a)n is
Tr + 1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
The rth term in the expansion of (3x – 4y)7 is
T4+1 = \({ }^7 \mathrm{C}_4\) (3x)7-4 (- 4y)4
T5 = \({ }^7 \mathrm{C}_4\) (3x)3 (4y)4
= 35 . 33 . x3 44 . y4
= 241920 x3 . y4

Question 3.
Find the middle term(s) in \(\left(\frac{3}{a^3}+5 a^4\right)^{20}\).
Solution:
Given \(\left(\frac{3}{a^3}+5 a^4\right)^{20}\)
Here, x = \(\frac{3}{a^3}\), a = 5a4, n = 20
Since, n = 20 is even,
Middle term = \(\frac{n}{2}\) + 1
= \(\frac{20}{2}\) + 1
= 10 + 1 = 11th term
r + 1 = 11
⇒ r = 10
The general term in this expansion is
Tr+1 = \({ }^{{ }^n} C_r\) xn-r ar
11th term of given expansion is
T10+1 = \({ }^{20} C_{10}\left(\frac{3}{a^3}\right)^{20-10}\left(5 a^4\right)^{10}\)
= \({ }^{20} \mathrm{c}_{10}\left(\frac{3}{a^3}\right)^{10}\left(5 a^4\right)^{10}\)

T11 = \({ }^{20} C_{10}\) . a-30 . 510 . a40
= \({ }^{20} C_{10}\) . 310 . 510 . a10

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 4.
Find the middle term(s) in the expansion of (4x2 + 5x3)17.
Solution:
Given (4x2 + 5x3)17
Here, x = 4x2, a = 5x3, n = 17
Since, n = 17 is odd, then
Middle terms \(\frac{\mathrm{n}+1}{2}, \frac{\mathrm{n}+3}{2}\) = 9, 10 terms
9’ term:
r + 1 = 9
⇒ r = 8
The general term in this expansion is
Tr+1 = \({ }^{{ }^n} C_r\) xn-r ar
9th term of given expansion is
T8+1 = \({ }^{17} \mathrm{c}_9\) (4x2)17-8 (5x3)8
= \({ }^{17} \mathrm{c}_9\) (4x2)9 (5x3)8
= \({ }^{17} \mathrm{c}_9\) . 49 . x18 . 58 . x24
= \({ }^{17} \mathrm{c}_9\) . 49 . 58 . x42

10th term:
r + 1 = 10
⇒ r = 9
The general term in this expansion is
Tr+1 = \({ }^{{ }^n} C_r\) xn-r ar
10th term in this expansion ¡s
T9+1 = \({ }^{17} \mathrm{C}_9\)(4x2)17-9 (5x3)9
T10 = \({ }^{17} \mathrm{C}_9\) (4x2)8 (5x3)9
= \({ }^{17} \mathrm{C}_9\) . 48 . 59 . x16 . x27
= \({ }^{17} \mathrm{C}_9\) . 48 . 59 . x43

Question 5.
Find the coefficient of x11 in \(\left(2 x^2+\frac{3}{x^3}\right)^{13}\).
Solution:
Given \(\left(2 x^2+\frac{3}{x^3}\right)^{13}\)
Here, x = 2x2,
a = \(\frac{3}{x^3}\), n = 13
Now, the general term in this expansion is
Tr+1 = \(\) xn-r ar
= \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) (2xr)13-r \(\left(\frac{3}{x^3}\right)^r\)
= \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) 213-r x26-2r . 32 . x-3r
= \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) 213-r 3r x26-5r ………………(1)
To find the coefficient of x11
Put 26 – 5r = 11
5r = 15
⇒ r = 3
Now substituting r = 3 in equation (1) we get
T3+1 = \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_3\) 213-3 33 x26-15
T4 = \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_3\) 210 33 x11
The coefficient of x11 in the expansion of \(\left(2 x^2+\frac{3}{x^3}\right)^{13}\) is \({ }^{13} \mathrm{C}_3\) 210 33.

Question 6.
Find the term independent of x in the expansion of \(\left(\sqrt{\frac{x}{3}}+\frac{3}{2 x^2}\right)^{10}\).
Solution:
Given \(\left(\sqrt{\frac{x}{3}}+\frac{3}{2 x^2}\right)^{10}\)
Here, x = \(\sqrt{\frac{x}{3}}\), a = \(\frac{3}{2 x^2}\), n = 10
The general term in this expansion is
Tr+1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
Tr+1 = \({ }^{10} C_r\left(\sqrt{\frac{x}{3}}\right)^{10-r}\left(\frac{3}{2 x^2}\right)^r\)
= \({ }^{10} C_r \frac{x^{\frac{10-r}{2}}}{3^{\frac{10-r}{2}}} \cdot \frac{3^r}{2^r} \cdot x^{-2 r}\)
= \({ }^{10} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}} \frac{3^{\mathrm{r}}}{3^{\frac{10-\mathrm{r}}{2}} \cdot 2^{\mathrm{r}}} \mathrm{x}^{\frac{10-\mathrm{r}}{2}-2 \mathrm{r}}\) ……………….(1)
To find the term independent of x11 (i.e., coeff. of x°)
Put \(\frac{10-\mathrm{r}}{2}\) – 2r = 0
10 – r – 4r = 0
5r = 10
⇒ r = 2
Substitute r = 2 in equation (1) we get
T = \({ }^{10} \mathrm{C}_2 \frac{3^2}{3^{\frac{10-2}{2}} \cdot 2^2} \cdot \mathrm{x}^{\frac{10-2}{2}-2^2}\)
= \({ }^{10} C_2 \frac{3^2}{3^3 \cdot 2^2} \cdot x^0\)
= \(\frac{10 \cdot 9}{1 \cdot 2} \times \frac{3^2}{3^4 \cdot 2^2}=\frac{10 \cdot 9}{1 \cdot 2} \cdot \frac{1}{9 \cdot 4} \cdot x^0=\frac{5}{4} x^0\)
The term independent of x in the given expansion is T3 = \(\frac{5}{4}\).

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 7.
Find the largest binomial coefficients In the expansion of (1 + x)19.
Solution:
Given, (1 + x)19
Here n = 19, an odd integer.
The largest binomial coefficients are \({ }^n C_{\frac{n-1}{2}}\) and \({ }^n C_{\frac{n+1}{2}}\)
\({ }^{19} \mathrm{C}_{\frac{19-1}{2}} \text { and }{ }^{19} \mathrm{C}_{\frac{19+1}{2}}\) = \({ }^{19} C_9 \text { and }{ }^{19} C_{10}\)
(Note that, \({ }^{19} C_{9}={ }^{19} C_{10}\)).

Question 8.
If the coefficients of (2r + 4)th, (r – 2)th terms in the expansion of (1 + x)21 equal find ‘r’.
Solution:
Given (1 – x)18
The general term in the expansion of (x + a)n is
Tr+1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
(2r + 4)th term in the expansion of (1 + x)18 is
T(2r+3)+1 = \({ }^{18} \mathrm{C}_{2 \mathrm{r}+3}\) (1) x2r+3
T2r+4 = \({ }^{18} \mathrm{C}_{2 \mathrm{r}+3}\) x2r+3
The coeff. of (2r + 4)th term is \({ }^{18} \mathrm{C}_{2 \mathrm{r}+3}\)
(r – 2) term in the expansion of (1 + x)18 is
T(r-3)+1 = \({ }^{18} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}-3}\) 118-(r-3) xr-3
Tr-2 = \({ }^{18} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}-3}\) . xr-3
The coeff. of (r – 2)nd term is \({ }^{18} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}-3}\)
∴ Given that two coefficients are equal.
\({ }^{18} \mathrm{C}_{2 \mathrm{r}+3}={ }^{18} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}-3}\)
\({ }^n C_r={ }^n C_s\)
⇒ n = r + s (or) r = s
18 = 2r + 3 + r – 3
2r + 3 = r – 3
3r = 18
⇒ r = 6
⇒ r = – 6
Since, r is a positive integer, we get r = 6.

Question 9.
Find the set E of x for which the binomial expansion (7 + 3x)-5.
Solution:
Given (7 + 3x)-5
7-5 (1 + \(\frac{3 x}{7}\))-5
The binomial expansion of (7 + 3x)-5 is valid when
\(\left|\frac{3 x}{7}\right|<1 \Rightarrow|x|<\frac{7}{3}\)
x ∈ \(\left(\frac{-7}{3}, \frac{7}{3}\right)\)

Question 10.
Find the set E of x for which the binomial expansion (7 – 4x)-5 is valid.
Solution:
Given (7 – 4x)-5 = 7-5 (1 – \(\frac{4 x}{7}\))-5
The binomial expansion of (7 – 4x)-5 is valid when
\(\left|\frac{-4 x}{7}\right|<1 \Rightarrow\left|\frac{4 x}{7}\right|<1\)
⇒ x < \(\frac{7}{4}\)
⇒ x ∈ \(\left(\frac{-7}{4}, \frac{7}{4}\right)\)
∴ E = \(\left(\frac{-7}{4}, \frac{7}{4}\right)\)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 11.
Find the 6th term of (1 + \(\frac{x}{2}\))-5
Solution:
Given, (1 + \(\frac{x}{2}\)))-5
Comparing this with (1 + x)n, where
x = \(\frac{x}{2}\), n = – 5,
⇒ r + 1 = 6
⇒ r = 5
The general term in the binomial expansion of (1 + x)n is

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 33

Question 12.
Find the coefficient of x6 in (3x – \(\frac{4}{x}\))10.
Solution:
Given (3x – \(\frac{4}{x}\))10
Here, x = 3x; a = – \(\frac{4}{x}\), n = 10
The general term in this expansion is
Tr+1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
= \({ }^{10} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) (3x)10-r \(\left(\frac{-4}{x}\right)^{\mathbf{r}}\)
= \({ }^{10} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) 310-r x10-r (- 4)r xr
= \({ }^{10} \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}}\) 310-r . (- 4)10-r . x10-2r …………..(1)
To find the coefficient of x-6,
put 10 – 2r = – 6
⇒ 2r = 16
⇒ r = 8
Now, substituting r = 8 in equation (1) we get
T8+1 = \({ }^{10} \mathrm{C}_8\) 310-8 (- 4)8 x10-16
T9 = \({ }^{10} \mathrm{C}_8\) 32 (4)8 x-6
The coeff. of x-6 in the expansion of (3x – \(\frac{4}{x}\))10 is \({ }^{10} \mathrm{C}_8\) . 32 . (4)8

Question 13.
Find the middle term (s) in the expansion of \(\left(4 a+\frac{3}{2} b\right)^{11}\).
Solution:
Given \(\left(4 a+\frac{3}{2} b\right)^{11}\)
Here, x = 4a; a = \(\frac{3}{2}\) b; n = 11
Since, n = 11 is odd,
Middle terms = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}+1}{2}, \frac{\mathrm{n}+3}{2}\) = 6, 7 terms.

6th term :
r + 1 = 6
⇒ r = 5
The general term in this expansion is
Tr+1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
6th term of given expansion ¡s
T5+1 = \({ }^{11} C_5(4 a)^{11-5}\left(\frac{3}{2} b\right)^5\)
T6 = \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_5(4 \mathrm{a})^6\left(\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{~b}\right)^5\)
= \(=11 C_5 \frac{4^6 \cdot 3^5}{2^5} \cdot a^6 \cdot b^5\)
T6 = \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_6 \frac{2^{12} \cdot 3^5}{2^5}\) . a4b5
= \({ }^{11} \mathrm{C}_6\) . a6 . b5

7th term :
r + 1 = 7
⇒ r = 6
The general term in this expansion is
Tr+1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
7th term of given expansion is

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 34

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 14.
Find the middle term (s) in the expansion of (4x2 + 5x3)17.
Solution:
Given (4x2 + 5x3)17.
Here, x = 4x2, a = 5x3, n= 17.
Since, n = 17 is odd, then
middle terms = \(\frac{n+1}{2}, \frac{n+3}{2}\) = 9, 10 terms

9th term :
r + 1 = 9
⇒ r = 8
The general term in this expansion is
Tr+1 = \({ }^n C_r\) xn-r ar
∴ 9th term in this expansion is
T9+1 = \({ }^{17} \mathrm{C}_9\)(4x2)17-9 (5x3)9
T10 = \({ }^{17} \mathrm{C}_9\) (4x2)8 (5x3)9
= \({ }^{17} \mathrm{C}_9\) 48 . 59 x16 . x27
= \({ }^{17} \mathrm{C}_9\) 48 . 59 . x43

Question 15.
Prove that 2 . C0 + 5 . C1 + 8 . C2 + ……………… + (3n + 2) Cn = (3n + 4) 2n-1
Solution:
Let S = 2 . C0 + 5 . C1 + 8 . C2 + ……………… + (3n + 2) Cn = (3n + 4) 2n-1 …………….(1)
By writing the terms in (1) in the reverse order
S = (3n + 2) . Cn + (3n – 1) . Cn-1 + (3n – 4) Cn-2 + ……………….. + 2. C0
S = (3n + 2) C0 + (3n – 1) C1 + (3n – 4) C2 + ……………… + 2 Cn ………….. (2)
Adding (1) and (2) we get,
S = 2 . C0 + 5 . C1 + 8 . C2 + …………… + (3n + 2) . Cn
S = (3n + 2) . C0 + (3n – 1) . C1 + (3n – 4) . C2 + ……………. + 2 . Cn
2S = (3n + 4)C0 + (3n + 4) C1 . (3n + 4) C2 + …………… + (3n + 4) Cn
2S = (3n + 4) (C0 + C1 + C2 + …………….. + Cn)
2S = (3n + 4) 2n
⇒ S = (3n + 4) 2n-1
∴ 2 . C0 + 5 . C1 + 8. C2 + …………… + (3n + 2) Cn = (3n + 4) . 2n-1

Question 16.
Prove that
(C0 + C1) (C1 + C1) (C2 + C3) + ………………… + (Cn-1 + Cn) = \(\frac{(n+1)^n}{n !}\) . C0 . C1 . C2 ……………. Cn

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 35

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 36

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 17.
Write the first 3 terms in the expansion of \(\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{x}}{2}\right)^{-5}\).
Solution:
Given \(\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{x}}{2}\right)^{-5}\)
We know that,

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 37

Hence, the first three terms in the expansion of \(\left(1+\frac{\mathrm{x}}{2}\right)^{-5}\) are 1, \(\frac{-5 x}{2}, \frac{15 x^2}{4}\).

Question 18.
Find the coefficient of x6 in the expansion of (1 – 3x)-2/5.
Solution:
Given that (1 + 3x)-2/5
The general term of (1 – 3x)-2/5 is
Tr+1 = \(\frac{n(n-1)(n-2) \ldots .(n-r+1)}{r !}\)
where x = – 3x, n = \(\frac{-2}{5}\)

Tr+1 = \(\frac{\frac{-2}{5}\left(\frac{-2}{5}-1\right)\left(\frac{-2}{5}-2\right) \ldots \ldots . .\left(\frac{-2}{5}-r+1\right)}{r !}(-3 x)^r\)

= \(\frac{\frac{-2}{5}\left(\frac{-7}{5}\right)\left(\frac{-12}{5}\right) \cdots \cdots \cdots\left(\frac{3}{5}-\mathrm{r}\right)}{\mathrm{r} !}(-3 \mathrm{r})^{\mathrm{r}}\)

= \(\frac{2 \cdot 7 \cdot 12 \ldots \ldots(5 \mathrm{r}-3)}{5^{\mathrm{r}} \cdot \mathrm{r} !}(3 \mathrm{x})^{\mathrm{r}}\)

Put r = 6
Then the coefficient of x-6 is \(\frac{2 \cdot 7 \cdot 12 \ldots \ldots .27}{5^6 \cdot 6 !}(3)^6\)
= \(\frac{2 \cdot 7 \cdot 12 \ldots \ldots .27}{6 !} \cdot\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)^6\).

Question 19.
Eind the coefficient of x4 in the expansion of (1 – 4x)3/5
Solution:
Given (1 – 4x)3/5
The general term of (1 – 4x)3/5 is
Tr+1 = \(\frac{n(n-1)(n-2) \ldots \ldots(n-r+1)}{r !}\) . xr
where, x = – 4x, n = \(\frac{-3}{5}\)

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 38

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 20.
Find the sum of the infinite series 1 + \(\frac{1}{3}+\frac{1 \cdot 3}{3 \cdot 6}+\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5}{3 \cdot 6 \cdot 9}+\ldots \ldots\). [TS – Mar. 2015]
Solution:
Let the given series is
S = 1 + \(\frac{1}{3}+\frac{1 \cdot 3}{3 \cdot 6}+\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5}{3 \cdot 6 \cdot 9}+\ldots \ldots\)
Now, comparing with

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 39

Question 21.
Find the sum of the infinite series 1 – \(\frac{4}{5}+\frac{4 \cdot 7}{5 \cdot 10}-\frac{4 \cdot 7 \cdot 10}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15}\) + …………..
Solution:
Let the given series is
S = 1 – \(\frac{4}{5}+\frac{4 \cdot 7}{5 \cdot 10}-\frac{4 \cdot 7 \cdot 10}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15}\) + …………..
Now comparing with

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 40

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 22.
Find the sum of the infinite series \(\frac{3}{4 \cdot 8}-\frac{3 \cdot 5}{4 \cdot 8 \cdot 12}+\frac{3 \cdot 5 \cdot 7}{4 \cdot 8 \cdot 12 \cdot 16}\).
Solution:
Let the given series

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 41

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 42

Question 23.
If t = \(\frac{4}{5}+\frac{4 \cdot 6}{5 \cdot 10}+\frac{4 \cdot 6 \cdot 8}{5 \cdot 10 \cdot 15}\) + ……………….. ∞, then prove that 9t = 16.
Solution:
Given

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 43

Here p = 4; p + q = 6;
⇒ q = 2
⇒ x = \(\frac{2}{5}\)
∴ (1) ⇒ 1 + t = \(\left(1-\frac{2}{5}\right)^{\frac{-4}{2}}\)
⇒ 1 +t = \(\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)^{-2}\)
⇒ 1 + t = \(\frac{25}{9}\)
⇒ 9t =16.

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 24.
If I, n are positive integers, 0 < f < 1 and if (7 + 4√3)n = 1 + f, then show that
i) I is an odd integer and
ii) (I + f) (1 – f) = 1.
Solution:
Sol. Since I, n are positive integers 0 < F < 1 and (7 + 4√3)n = 1 + F
Now, 36 < 48 < 49
⇒ 6 < 4√3 < 7 ⇒ – 6 > – 4√3 > – 7
⇒ 1 > 7 – 4√3 > 0
⇒ 0 < 7 – 4√3 < 1
⇒ 0< 7 – 4√3 < 1
⇒ o < (7 – 4√3)n < 1
Let (7 – 4√3)n = f
∴ 0 < f < 1
Now, 1 + f = (7 + 4√3)n

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2A Binomial Theorem Important Questions Long Answer Type 44

where k is an integer
⇒ I + F + f = Even integer.
Since, I is an integer, F + f is an integer.
But, 0 < F < 1, 0 < f < 1
⇒ 0 < F + f < 2.
∴ f + F = 1
From (1)
⇒ I + 1 = Even integer
⇒ Even integer – 1 = Odd Integer
∴ I is an odd integer.

ii) L.H.S: (I + f) (I – f) = (7 + 4√3)n . F
= (7 + 4√3)n (7 – 4√3)n
= (49 – 48)n = 1n = 1 = R.H.S
∴ LH.S = R.H.S.

Question 25.
Find the 8th term of \(\left(1-\frac{5 x}{2}\right)^{-3 / 5}\). [AP – Mar. ’18]
Solution:
Given \(\left(1-\frac{5 x}{2}\right)^{-3 / 5}\)
T8 = \(\frac{\left(\frac{-3}{5}\right)\left(\frac{-3}{5}-1\right)\left(\frac{-3}{5}-2\right) \ldots\left(\frac{-3}{5}-6\right)}{7 !}\left(\frac{-5 x}{2}\right)^7\)
= \(\frac{\left(\frac{3}{5}\right)\left(\frac{8}{5}\right)\left(\frac{13}{5}\right) \ldots\left(\frac{33}{5}\right)}{7 !}\left(\frac{5 x}{2}\right)^7\)
= \(\frac{3 \times 8 \times 13 \times \ldots . \times 33}{7 !}\left(\frac{x}{2}\right)^7\)

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 7th Lesson d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 7th Lesson d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
What are transition elements ? Give examples.
Answer:
Transition elements are defined as the elements having partially filled d-orbitals in the atoms in the elemental form or in the chemically significant stable oxidation states. Examples : Fe, Mn, Cr.

Question 2.
Which elements of 3d, 4d, and 5d series are not regarded as transition elements and why ?
Answer:
The elements Zn, Cd, Hg are not regarded as transition elements. They belong to 3d, 4d and 5d series respectively. Their general electronic configuration is (n – 1) d10 ns2. The d-orbitals in these elements are completely filled. Therefore, they are not regarded as transition elements.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 3.
Why are d-block elements called transition elements ?
Answer:
The d-block elements are placed in between s and p-blocks in the periodic table. There is a transition in properties between the electropositive s-block elements and the electronegative p-block elements. Hence, d- block elements are named transition elements.

Question 4.
Write the general electronic configuration of transition elements.
Answer:
(n – 1) d10 ns1-2
The (n – 1) stands for the penultimate shell. The (n -1) d orbitals may have one to ten electrons and the outermost ns orbital may have one or two electrons.

Question 5.
In what way is the electronic configuration of transition elements different from non-transition elements ?
Answer:
The transition elements have incompletely filled (n – 1) d orbitals.

In transition elements, the valence shell and penultimate shell are incompletely filled. Their general electronic configuration is (n- 1) d1 – 10 ns1 – 2.

The non-transition elements i.e., the representative elements have the incompletely filled valence shell. The inner transition elements have the outer three energy levels incomplete.

Question 6.
Write the electronic configuration of chromium (Cr) and copper (Cu).
Answer:
Cr (24) – 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d 4s1 or [Ar] 4s1 3d5
Cu (29) – 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s1 or [Ar] 4s1 3d10

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 7.
Why do transition elements exhibits characteristic properties ?
Answer:
The transition elements are characterised by specific and special properties which can be explained on the basis of their chara-cteristic electronic configuration. The partly filled (n -1) d orbital is the cause of special properties like variable oxidation states, magnetic properties etc.

Question 8.
Scandium is a transition element. But zinc is not. Why ? [IPE 14]
Answer:
The atom of Sc has one unpaired d-electron. So it is a transition element. The electronic configuration of Zn is (Z = 30) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2.
The common oxidation state of Zn is +2.
The electronic configuration of Zn++ is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10.
As neither Zn nor Zn++ have partly filled 3d orbitals, Zinc is not considered as transition element.

Question 9.
Even though silver has d10 configuration, it is regarded as transition element Why ?
Answer:
Silver (Z = 47) can exhibit +2 oxidation state where in it will have incompletely filled d- orbitals (4d), hence it is a transition element.

Question 10.
Write the electronic configuration of Co2+ and Mn2+.
Answer:
Co2+ : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d7 Or [Ar] 3d7
Mn2+ : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5 Or [Ar] 3d5

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 11.
Why are Mn2+ compounds more stable than Fe2+ towards oxidation to their +3 state ?
Answer:
Mn2+ has stable configuration because 3d orbitals are half-filled. Hence it is stable.

Fe2+ has the configuration [Ar] 3d6. As it gains half-filled electronic configuration jt! by losing an electron it is susceptible to oxidation.

Question 12.
Which metal in the first series of transition metals exhibits + 1 oxidation state most frequently and why ?
Answer:
Copper
Reason : The second ionisation enthalpy , is unusually high. Removal of second electron disrupts the stable configuration of Cu+.

Question 13.
Why do transition elements exhibit more than one oxidation state (variable oxidation states)?
Answer:
Transition elements exhibit general Oxidation state of + II by loosing the electrons in the outer “s” orbital. They also Show other oxidation states because of the participation of (n – 1) d electrons in bonding.

Both ns and (n -1) d electrons are available for bonding because there is very little difference between the energies of ns & (n – 1) d orbitals.

Question 14.
Though Sc is a transition element, it does not exhibit variable oxidation state. Why ?
Answer:
As there is only one d-electron Sc does not show vairable oxidation states. Thus Sc (II) is unknown. Further d1 configuration is unstable.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 15.
Why is it difficult to obtain M3+ oxidation state in Ni, Cu and Zn ?
Answer:
As the third ionisation enthalpies are quite high, it is difficult to obtain M+3 state in Ni, Cu and Zn.

Question 16.
Why is Cr2+ reducing and Mn3+ oxidizing even though both have the same d4 electronic configuration ?
Answer:
Cr2+ is reducing as its configuration changes from d4 to d3, the latter having a half- filled dxy, dyz, dzx orbitals. On the other hand, the change from Mn2+ to Mn3+ results in the half-filled d5 configuration which has extra stability.

Question 17.
Although Cr, Mo and W belong to the same group (group 6) Cr (VI) is a strong oxidizing agent while Mo (VI) and W (VI) are not. Why ?
Answer:
In Group 6, Mo(VI) and W(VI) are found to be more stable than Cr(VI). Thus Cr (VI) in the form of dichromate acidic medium is a strong oxidising agent, whereas MnO3 and WO3 are not.

Question 18.
What do you infer from the fact that M3+ / M2+ standard electrode potential of Mn is comparatively higher and that of Fe is comparitively lower ?
Answer:
The higher value for Mn shows that Mn2+ (d5) is particularly stable whereas comparatively low value for Fe shows the extra stability of Fe3+ (d5 configuration).

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 19.
Transition elements have high melting points. Why ?
Answer:
The melting points of the metals are very high. The high values are attributed to the strong interactions present in the metals.

The involvement of greater number of electrons from (n – 1) d in addition to the ns electrons in the interatomic metallic bonding is the reason for high m.p.’s.

Question 20.
Among the first transition series (3d series) Chromium has highest melting point. Why ?
Answer:
In chromium, there is involvement of maximum number of (n -1) d electrons (d5) and one ns electron is interatomic metallic bonding. So the metallic bonding is strong. Hence the m.p is high.

Question 21.
Compared to s-block elements, the transition elements exhibit higher enthalpy of atomization. Why ?
Answer:
Because of large number of unpaired electrons in their atoms, they have stronger interatomic interaction. Hence stronger bonding between atoms resulting in higher enthalpies of atomisation.

Question 22.
Among the first transition series (3d series) zinc has lowest enthalpy of atomization. Why?
Answer:
As there are only two electrons available for metallic bond formation, the interatomic attractions are less. Hence the zinc has lowest enthalpy of atomisation.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 23.
How do you expect the density of transition element to vary in a given series and why ?
Answer:
Increase in density is expected from in the transition elements from Sc Z = 21 to copper Z = 29.
Reason :

  1. Metallic bond strength increases due to increase in (n – 1) d electrons.
  2. Metallic radius decreases.
  3. Increase in atomic mass.
    As expected, the density increases from scandium to copper in the 3d series.

Question 24.
How do the atomic and ionic sizes vary among transition metals in a given series ?
Answer:
The atomic and ionic radii decrease slightly with the increase in a series of transition elements. This is because of poor screening by d-electrons.

New electron enters into a d orbital each time, nuclear charge increases by unity as we move from one element to the other in the transition series. As the shielding effect of a d-electron is not effective, the net attraction between the nuclear charge and the outermost electron increases and the ionic radius decreases.

Question 25.
Why do Mn, Ni and Zn exhibit more negative E values than expected ?
Answer:
The stability of the half-filled d-subshell in Mn2+ and completely filled d10 configuration in Zn++ are related to their more negative E values. The value is more for Ni because of its highest negative \(\Delta \mathrm{H}_{\text {hyd }}^{\ominus}\) .

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 26.
Among the first transition series (3d series) only copper has positive E M2+/M value. Why?
Answer:
Positive E value means less ability to act as reducing agent. Thus Cu cannot liberate H2 from acids.
Reason:

  1. Cu has high value for enthalpy of atomisation ∆aH.
  2. Low value for enthalpy of hydration ∆hydH
  3. The high energy to transform Cu(s) to Cu++ (aq) is not balanced by its hydration enthalpy.

Question 27.
Cu11 forms halides like CuF2, CuCl2 and CuBr2 but not Cul2. Why ?
Answer:
Cu2+ oxidises I to I2. Hence CuI2 is not known.
2CU2+ + 4I2+ → Cu2I2 (s) + I2

Question 28.
The highest Mil fluoride is MnF4 where as the highest oxide is Mn2O7. Why ?
Answer:
Oxygen can form multiple bonds with metals. This explains the ability of oxygen to stabilise high oxidation states. In the covalent oxide Mn2O7 each Mn is tetra-hedrally surrounded by O’s including a Mn – O – Mn bridge. The ability to stabilise higher oxidation state is less for fluorine when compared to oxygen. Hence it can form MnF4 Only.

Question 29.
In its fluoride or Oxide, in which a transition metal exhibits highest oxidation state and why ?
Answer:
Mn exhibits its highest oxidation state in Mn2O7, because of the ability of oxygen to form multiple bonds with metals. In the covalent oxide, Mn2O7 each Mn is tetrahedrally surrounded by oxygen including a Mn – O – Mn bridge.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 30.
Why Zn2+ is diamagnetic whereas Mn2+ is paramagnetic ? [TS 15]
Answer:
Electronic configuration of Zn++ is [Ar] 3d10.
As there are no unpaired electrons, Zn++ is diamagnetic.
Electronic configuration of Mn++ is [Ar] 3d5. As there are unpaired electrons, Mn++ is paramagnetic.

Question 31.
Write ‘spin only’ formula to calculate the magnetic moment of transition metal ions.
Answer:
Magnetic moment μ = \(\sqrt{n(n+2)}\)
n = number of unpaired electrons
m = magnetic moment in Bohr magnetons

Question 32.
Calculate the ‘spin only’ magnetic moment of Fe2+ (aq) ion. [AP 17]
Answer:
Fe (26) Electronic configuration [Ar] 3d6.4s2 Fe2+. Electronic configuration is [Ar] 3d6
No. of unpaired electrons is 4.
Spin only formula μ = \(\sqrt{n(n+2)}\)
= \(\sqrt{4 \times 6}=\sqrt{24}\) = 4.9 BM

Question 33.
What is meant by ‘disproportionation’ ? Give an example of disproportionation reaction in aqueous solution.
Answer:
If an element undergoes both oxidation and reduction, it is called disproportionation reaction.
Ex : Many copper (I) compounds are un-stable in aqueous solution and undergo disproportionation.
2 Cu+ → Cu++ + Cu

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 34.
Aqueous Cu2+ ions are blue in colour, where as Aqueous Zn2+ ions are colourless. [TS 16]
Answer:
Cu++ contains unpaired electron. It is coloured due to d-d transition. Zn++ does not contain unpaired electron. Hence it is colourless.

Question 35.
What are complex compounds ? Give examples.
Answer:
Complex compounds are those in which the metal ions bind a number of anions or neutral molecules.
Ex: [Fe (CN)6]3-, [Fe(CN)6]4-, [Cu (NH3)4]2+

Question 36.
Why do the transition metals form a large number of complex compounds ?
Answer:
Transition metals form a large number of complex compounds due to

  1. smaller sizes of the metal ions,
  2. high ionic charges,
  3. availability of d-orbitals for bond formation.

Question 37.
How do transition metals exhibit catalytic activity ?
Answer:
Transition metals possess good catalytic properties. This property is due to the the free valencies of the metals and also due to variable oxidation states.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 38.
Give two reactions in which transition metals or their compounds acts as catalysts.
Answer:

  1. Vanadium pentoxide is used as catalyst in the manufacture of sulphuric acid by Contact process.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 1
  2. Pt is used as catalyst in Ostwald process.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 2

Question 39.
What is an alloy ? Give example.
Answer:
When metals are mixed and the resulting liquid is allowed to solidify, the product formed is called an alloy. It may also contain non-metals.
Ex: German silver 25 – 50% Cu,
10 – 30% Ni
25 – 35% Zn
Nichrome 60% Ni, 25% Fe, 15% Cr.
Bell metal 80% Cu, 20% Sn

Question 40.
Why do the transition metals readily form alloys ?
Answer:
As the crystal structures of the transition metals are similar, alloys are formed among them readily.

Question 41.
How does the ionic character and acidic nature vary among the oxides of first transition series?
Answer:
The oxides dissolve in acids and bases to form oxometallic salts. Potassium dichromate and potassium permanganate are common examples.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 42.
What is the efffect of increasing pH on a solution of potassium dichromate ?
Answer:
It is converted into chromate by alkali. Chromate is yellow in colour.
K2Cr2O7 + 2KOH → 2K2CrO4 + H2O

Question 43.
Name the oxometal anions of the first series of transition metals in which the metal exhibits the oxidation state equal to its group number.
Answer:
6th group – K2Cr2O7
Cr2O7– – – is dichromate anion in which the oxidation number of Cr is + VI which is equal to its group number.
In permanganate anion \(\mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}\), Mn shows + VII state which is equal to its group number.

Question 44.
Permanganate titrations are carried out in the presence of sulphuric acid but not in presence of hydrochloric acid. Why ?
Answer:
The oxidation reactions of potassium per- mangante are generally carried out in presence of sulphuric acid. Hydrochloric acid should not be Used as the medium since it liberates chlorine by reaction with permanganate.
2KMnO4 + 16HCl → 2MnCl2 + 2KCl + 5Cl2 ↑ + 8H2O

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 45.
What is lanthanoid contraction ? [T.S. Mar. 19]
Answer:
Gradual decrease in atomic and ionic sizes from La to Lu is called Lanthanoid con-traction.
Reason:

  1. Imperfect shielding of one electron by another in the same set of orbitals (4f)
  2. The shielding of one 4f electron by another is less than that of one d electron by another.
  3. Nuclear charge increases along the series from La to Lu.
  4. Due to poor shielding of 4f electrons, there is fairly regular decrease in the size of the entire 4f orbitals.

Question 46.
What are the different oxidation states exhibited by the lanthanoids ?
Answer:
Lanthanides react easily with water to give solutions giving + 3 ions. The principal oxidation state is + 3 although +4 and +2 oxidation states are also exhibited.

Question 47.
What is misch metal ? Give its composition and uses. [AP 16]
Answer:
Misch metal is an alloy of Lanthanoid metal.
Composition : 95% Lanthanoid metal and 5% iron and traces of S, C, Ca and Al.
It is used in making tracer bullets.

Question 48.
What is actinoid contraction ?
Answer:
The elements from Ac to Lr (Z = 89 to 103) are called actinides. In these elements the 5f orbital is gradually filled.

There is steady decrease in the size of M3+ and M4+ cations in actinide elements. The shielding of one electron in 5f orbital by another electron present in the same orbital is very poor. Due to this poor shielding effect, the increase in the nuclear charge by one unit brings the valence shell nearer to the nucleus and the size of the cation decreases.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 49.
What are coordination compounds ? Give two examples.
Answer:
Coordination compounds are those in which metal ions bind a number of anions or neutral molecules giving complex species with characteristic properties.

The molecules or ions containing one pair of electrons donate the electron pair to the central metal ion to form coordinate covalent bond.
Ex: [Fe(CN)6]4-
Hexacyanoferrate (II)

Question 50.
What is a coordination polyhedron ?
Answer:
The spacial arrangement of the ligand atoms which are directly attached to the central atom/ion defines a coordination polyhedron about the central atom. Most common coordination polyhedra are octahedral, square planar and tetrahedral.
For example, [Co(NH3)6]2+ is octahedral, Ni(CO)4 is tetrahedral.

Question 51.
What is a double salt ? Give example.
Answer:
Those compounds which lose their identity in solution and break down into simple ions are called double salts. For example, an aqueous solution of potash alum K2SO4. Al2 Al2(SO4)3 . 24H2O gives the test for K+, Al3+ and \(\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\) ions in its solution form.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 52.
What is the difference between a double salt and a complex compound ?
Answer:

Double SaltsComplex compounds
1) Compounds which lose their identity in solution and break down into simple ions are called double salts.1) Compounds which retain their identity even when dissolved in water are called complex compounds.
2) Metal ions exhibit their normal valency.
Ex : Carnalite KCl. MgCl2 6H2O2
2) Metal ion is surrounded by a number of oppositely charged ions or neutral molecules which are more in number than its normal valency.
Ex : Potassium Ferro Cyanide ku[Fe(CN)6]

Question 53.
What is a ligand ? [Mar. 2018, TS]
Answer:
A ligand is an ion or a molecule containing lone pairs of electrons which can be donated to a transition metal ion to form metal- ligand coordinate covalent bond.
Ex: NH3, CN

Question 54.
Give one example each for ionic and neutral ligands.
Answer:
Ionic Ligands: Cyano CN; amino NH2
Neutral Ligands : Carbonyl CO ; Ammine NH3

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 55.
How many moles of AgCl is precipitated when 1 mole of CoCl3 is treated with AgNO3 solution ?
Answer:
Three moles of AgCl is precipitated when 1 mole of COCl3 is treated with AgNO3 solution.

Question 56.
What is a chelate ligand ? Give example.
Answer:
A ligand which can form ring type complex is called chelate ligand.
Ethylenediamine H2N – CH2 – CH2 – NH2 is a chelate ligand. It can form ring type complex.

Question 57.
What is an ambidentate ligand ? Give example.
Answer:
Ligands which have two or more different donor sites but only one of these is attached to a single metal atom at a given time, are called ambidentate ligand.
Ex : NCS Thiocyanato M ← SCN isothio- cyanato M ← NSC

Question 58.
CuSO4 . 5H2O is blue in colour where as anhydrous CuSO4 is colourless. Why ?
Answer:
A) Colour of a complex is due to splitting of d-orbitals and d-d transition of the electron.

In the absence of ligand, crystal field splitting does not occur and hence the substance is colourless. Due to the absence of ligand, the water molecules, anhydrous CuSO4 is colourless. CuSO4 . 5H2O is blue in colour due to the water molecules and the splitting of d-orbitals.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 59.
FeSO4 solution mixed with (NH4)2SO4 solution in 1:1 molar ratio gives the test for Fe2+ ion but CuSO4 mixed with aqueous ammonia in 1:4 molar ratio does not give the test of Cu2+ ion. Why?
Answer:
FeSO4 with (NH4)2SO4 in 1 : 1 molar ratio forms a double salt FeSO4. (NH4)2 SO4 . 6H2O which gives a test for all its constituent ions. On the other hand, CuSO4 with aq. ammonia in 1 :4 molar ratio forms a coordination compound [Cu (NH3)4] SO4. Hence it does not give test for Cu++ ion.

Question 60.
How many geometrical isomers are poss-ible in the following coordination entities ?
i) [Cr(C2O4)3]3-
ii) [Co(NH3)3Cl3]
Answer:
i) No geometric isomers are possible.
ii)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 3
Another geometrical isomer occurs in [Ma3b3] type like [Co (NH3)3 Cl3]. If three donor atoms of the same ligands occupy adjacent positions, at the corners of octa-hedral face we have the facial isomer (fac). When the positions occupied are around the meridian of the octahedron, we get the meridonial (mer) isomer.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 4

Question 61.
What is the coordination entity formed when excess of aqueous KCN is added to an aqueous solution copper sulphate ? Why?
Answer:
When aq KCN is added to the aq. solution of CuSO4, Octahedral complex of hexa cyan- idocuprate (10 is formed ,
CuSO4 + 6KCN → K4[CU(CN)6] + K2SO4

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 62.
[Cr(NH3)6]3+ is paramagnetic while [Ni(CN)4]2- is diamagnetic. Why ?
Answer:
In [Cr(NH3)6]3+, NH3 is a weak field ligand and Cr has an electronic configuration of [Ar] 3d3 with three unpaired electrons. Hence [Cr(NH3)6]3 is paramagnetic. In [Ni(CN)4]2-, CN is a strong field ligand therefore Ni2+ ion has all the d-electrons paired. Hence, [Ni(CN)4]2- is diamagnetic.

Question 63.
A solution of [Ni(H2O)6]2+ is green but a solution of [Ni(CN)2]2- is colourless. Why ?
Answer:
In [Ni(H2O)6]2+, Ni2+ ion has two unpaired electron and it shows colour.
In [Ni(CN)4]2-, there is no unpaired electron. Hence it is colourless.
A solution of [Ni (H2O)6]2+ is green but a solution of [Ni (CN)4]2- colourless.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 5
[Ni(H2O)6]2+ is an outer orbital complex.
As it contains two unpaired electrons, it is paramagnetic and coloured.
In the formation of [Ni(CN)4]2-, electron pairing takes place in Ni2+.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 6
Ni2+ undergoes dsp2 hybridisation and it is square planar. As it does not contain unpaired electron, it is colourless.

Question 64.
[Fe(CN)4]2- and [Fe(H2O)6]2+ are of different colours in dilute solutions. Why ?
Answer:

  1. Different ligands produce different crystal field splittings.
  2. Different geometric fields also produce different crystal field splittings.
    As d – d transitions require different energies, the colours exhibited by [Fe(CN)4]2- and [Fe(H2O)6]2+ are different.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 65.
What is the oxdiation state of cobalt in [AP 16]
i) K3[CO(CO4)3] and
ii) [Co(NH3)6]3+
iii) K[Co(CO)4] ?
Answer:
i) Ox. number of of Co in K3 [Co(C2O4)3] is + 3.
ii) Ox. no. of Co in [Co (NH3)6]3+ is + 3.
iii) Ox. on of cobalt in K[Co(CO)4] is -1.

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 66.
Compared to 3d series the corresponding transition metals of 4d and 5d transition series show high enthalpy of atomization. Explain.
Answer:
The melting points and boiling points of the transition elements are generally very high.

In the second and third row elements M – M bonds are much more common. The Metal – Metal (M – M) bonding occurs not only in the metals themselves but also in some compounds. M – M bonding is quite rare in the first row transition elements.

Hence because of increasing in atomic weight and also strong metallic bonding, the enthalpies of 4d and 5d series are higher than those of 3d series.

Question 67.
Compared to the changes in atomic and ionic sizes of elements of 3d and 4d series, the change in radii of elements of 4d and 5d series is virtually the same. Comment.
Answer:
When we compare the changes in ionic and atomic sizes of 3d series with those of 4d and 5d series, there is an increase from the 3d to 4d series of elements. But the radii of the third (5d) series are virtually the same as those of the corresponding members of 4d series (second series).

This is because of the filling of 4f before the 5d series of elements begin. The filling of 4f before 5d orbital results in a regular decrease in atomic radii called lanthanoid contraction. Because of lanthanide contraction, the expected increase in atomic size with increasing atomid number.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 68.
Account for the zero oxidation state of Ni and Fe in [Ni (CO)4] and [Fe(CO)5] respectively.
Answer:
Low oxidation are found when a complex compound has ligands capable of π-accep- tor character in addition to σ bonding. For example, Ni(CO)4 and Fe(CO)5, the oxidation of nickel and iron is zero. The metal- carbon-bond in metal carboyls possesses both σ and π character.

Question 69.
Why do the transition metal ions exhibit characteristic colours in aqueous solution. Explain giving examples.
Answer:
When an electron from a lower energy d- orbital of a metal ion in a complex is excited to a higher energy d-orbital of the same n value, the energy of excitation corresponds to the frequency of light absorbed. This frequency generally lies in the visible region. The colour absorbed corresponds to the complementary colour of the light absorbed. The frequency of light absorbed is determined by the nature of the ligand. In aqueous solutions, where water molecules are ligands
Ti3+ …………… purple
V4+ …………… blue
Cr3+ ……………. violet
Fe3+ ……………. yellow
Fe2+ ……………. green
To exhibit colour the ion should have at least unpaired (n -1) d electron. The colour is due to d – d transitions.

Question 70.
Explain the catalytic action of Iron (III) in the reaction between I and S2O82- ions.
Answer:
Transition metals and their compounds are known for their catalytic activity. This activity is ascribed to their ability to adopt multiple oxidation states to form complexes. For example, iron (III) catalyses the reaction between iodide and persulphate ions.
2I + S2O82- → I2 + 2SO42-
An explanation of this catalytic action can be given as :
2Fe3+ + 2I → 2Fe2+ + I2
2Fe2+ + S2O82- → 2Fe2+ + 2SO42-

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 71.
What are interstitial compounds ? How are they formed ? Give two examples. [AP 15]
Answer:
Interstitial compounds are those which are formed when small atoms like H, C, or N are trapped inside the crystal lattices of metals. They are usually non-stoichiometric and are neither typically ionic nor covalent.
Example: TiC, Mn4N, VH0.56 and Ti H1.7 etc.

Question 72.
Write the characteristics of interstitial compounds.
Answer:

  1. Interstitial compounds are non-stoichiometric.
  2. They are neither typically ionic nor covalent.
  3. They have high melting points, higher than those of pure metals.
  4. They are very hard.
  5. They retain metallic conductivity.
  6. They are chemically inert.

Question 73.
Write the characteristics properties of transition elements. [AP ’15]
Answer:
The transition elements are characterised by specific and special properties which are explained on the basis of their characteristic electronic configurations. They are

  1. They exhibit variable oxidation states.
  2. Most of the transition elements and their ions show paramagnetic property. This is due to presence unpaired d-electron.
  3. They form coloured compounds.
  4. They have alloy forming ability.
  5. Complex forming ability.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 74.
Write down the electronic configuration of
(i) Cr3+
(ii) Cu+
(iii) Co2+
(iv) Mn2+
Answer:
i) Electronic configuration of Cr3+ = [Ar] 3d3
ii) Electronic configuration of Cu+ = [Ar] 3d10
iii) Electronic configuration of Co2+ = [Ar] 3d7 4s3
iv) Electronic configuration of Mn2+ =[Ar] 3d5

Question 75.
What may be the stable oxidation state of the transition element with the following d electron configurations in the ground state of their atoms: 3d3 3d5 3d8 and 3d4 ?
Answer:
Electronic configuration ………… Stable state
3d3 4s2 ………….. +2, and +5
3d5 4s2 ………….. +2, +7
3d8 4s2 …………. +2, +5
3d4 4s2 ………….. +3, +6

Question 76.
What is lanthanoid contraction? What are the consequences of lanthanoid contraction ?
Answer:
There is gradual decrease in the atomic and ionic sizes of the lanthanide elements. The filling of 4f before 5d orbital results in a regular decrease in atomic radii called lanthanoid contraction. This is due to the imperfect shielding of one electron by another in the same set of orbitals. However, the shielding of one 4f electron by another is less than that of one d electron by another, and as the nuclear charge increases along the series, there is fairly regular decrease in the size of the entire 4fn orbitals.

Consequences:

  1. The net result of the lanthanoid contraction is that the second and the third series exhibit similar radii (e.g.: Zr 160 pm Hf 159 pm) and have very similar physical and chemical properties much more than the expected on the basis of usual family relationship.
  2. The decrease in metallic radius coupled with increase in atomic mass results in a general increase in the density of these elements.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 77.
How is the variability in oxidation states of transition metals different from that of the non transition metals ? Illustrate with examples.
Answer:
The variability of oxdiation states, a characteristic property of transition elements arises due to incomplete filling of d orbitals in such a way that their oxdiation states differ from each other by unity.
Ex: VII, VIII, VIV, VV.

But in non-transition elements the oxidation states normally differ by a unit of two.
Although in the p-block elements the lower oxidation states are favoured by the heavier members (due to inert pair effect.)

The opposite is true in the groups of d- block. For example, in group 6, Mo(VI) and W(VI) are found to be more stable than Cr (VJ). Thus Cr (VI) in the form of dichromate in acidic medium is a strong oxidising agent, whereas MoO3 and WO3 are not.

Question 78.
Describe the preparation of potassium dichromate from iron chromite ore.
Answer:
Dichromates are generally prepared from chromite. Chromites are obtained by the fusion of chromite ore. (FeCr2O4) with potassium carbonate in free access of air. The yellow solution of chromate is filtered and acidifed with sulphuric acid to give a solution from which orange coloured potassium dicromate can be crystallised.
4FeCr2O4 + 8K2CO3 + 7O2→ 8K2CrO4 + 2Fe2O3 + 8CO2
2K2CrO4 + 2H+ → K2Cr2O7 + 2K+ + H2O

Question 79.
Describe the oxidisingaction of potassium dichromate and write the ionic equations for its
With (i) iodide
(ii) iron (II) solution
(iii) H2S and
(iv) Sn (II)
Answer:
In acidic solution the oxidising action of dicromate can be represented as follows.
Cr2O72- + 14H+ + 6e → 2Cr3+ + 7H2O
It oxidises iodide to iodine.
Cr2O72- + 14H+ + 6I → 2Cr3+ + 3I2 + 7H2O
It oxidises H2S to sulphur.
Cr2O72- + 14H+ + 3H2S → 2Cr3+ + 6H+ + 3S + 7H2O
It oxidises Sn2+ to Sn4+
Cr2O72- + 14H+ + 3Sn2+ → 3Sn4+ + 2Cr3++ 7H2O

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 80.
Describe the preparation of potassium permanganate.
Answer:
Potassium permanganate is prepared by the fusion of MnO2 with an alkali metal hydroxide and an oxidising agent like KNO3. This produces dark green K2MnO4 which disproportionates in a neutral or acidic solution to give permanganate.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 7

Question 81.
How does the acidified permanganate solution react with (i) iron (ii) ions (iii) SO2 and (iv) oxalic acid.
Write die ionic equations fur the reactions.
Answer:
KMnO4 oxidises FeSO4 to Fe2(SO4)3,
2KMnO4 + 8H2SO4 + 10 FeSO4 → K2SO4 + 2 MnSO4 + 5 Fe2(SO4)3 + 8H2O
(or) 5 Fe2+ + \(\mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}\) + 8H+ → Mn2+ + 4H2O + 5Fe3+

II) Sulphurous acid is oxidised to sulphate or sulphuric acid,
5 \(\mathrm{SO}_3^{2-}\) + 2 \(\mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}\) + 6H+ → 2Mn++ + 3H2O + 5SO42-

III) It oxidises oxalic acid to CO2.
2KMnO4 + 3H2 SO4 + 5H2C2O4 → K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 8H2O – 10 CO2
(or) 5\(\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{O}_4^{2-}\) + 2\(\mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}\) + 16H+ → 2Mn2+ + 8H2O + 10CO2

Question 82.
Predict which of the ions, Cu+, Sc3+, Mn2+, Fe2+ are coloured in aqueous solution ? Give reasons.
Answer:
Electronic configuration of Cu+ = [Ar ] 3d10 – colourless
Electronic configuration of Sc3+ = [Ar] colourless
Electronic configuration of Mn2+ = [Ar] 3d5 coloured
Electronic configuration of Fe2+ = [Ar] 3d5 coloured
Cu+ and Sc3+ are colourless because they do not have unpaired d-electrons.

Mn2+ and Fe2+ are coloured due to the presence of unpaired d-electron. Electronic transition takes from lower energy d-orbital to higher energy d-orbital with absorption of visible light. Complementary colour is observed.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 83.
Compare the stability of + 2 oxidation state of the elements of the first transition series.
Answer:
The standard values E for M2+/M indicate a decreasing tendency to form divalent cations across the series.

E values for Mn, Ni and Zn are more negative than expected from the general trend. This is due to the stability associated with half-filled d subshell (d5) in Mn2+ and completely filled d shell (d10) in Zinc.

For Nickel E value is related to the highest negative value of enthalpy of hydration.

Many copper ©compounds are unstable in aqueous solution and undergo disporportionation.
2Cu+ → Cu++ + Cu
The stability of Cu++ (aq) rather than Cu+ (aq) is due to the much more negative ∆Ehyd of Cu2+ than Cu+. It compensates for the second ionisation enthalpy of Cu.

Question 84.
Use Hund’s rule to derive the electronic configuration of Ce3+ ion, and calculate its magnetic moment on the basis of ‘spin- only’ formula.
Answer:
Electronic configuration of Ce is [Xe] 4f1 5d1 6s2.
Electronic configuration of Ce3+ is [Xe] 4f1.
Magnetic moment = \(\sqrt{n(n+2)}=\sqrt{3}\) = 1.73 B.M.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 85.
Write down the number of 3d electrons in each of the following ions : Ti2+, V2+, Cr3+ and Mn2+. Indicate how would you expect the five 3d orbitals to be occupied for these hydrated ions (octahedral).
Answer:

ElementElectronic configuration of the atomIon/Electronic configurationNo. of d-electrons
Ti[Ar] 3d2 4s2Ti2‘, [Ar] 3d22
V[Ar] 3d3 4s2V2+, [Ar] 3d33
Cr[Ar] 3d5 4s1Cr3+, [Ar] 3d44
Mn[Ar]3dS4s2Mn2+, [Ar] 3d55

As H2O is a weak ligand, electron pairing does not take place.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 8

Question 86.
Explain Werner’s theory of coordination compounds with suitable examples. [AP 17; TS 15; IPE 14] [Mar. 2018, AP & TS]
Answer:
Werner proposed two types of valencies to explain the formation and the structure of these complex compounds.

i) The Primary valence:
This corresponds to the oxidation state of the central transition metal ion in the complex compounds. This primary valence is satisfied by a negative ion only in the complex compound.

ii) Secondary valence:
This is equal to the number of chemical groups bound to central metal ion. The no. of secondary valencies is called co-ordination number of the metal.

iii) These secondary valencies are directed in space which determines the shape of the complex.
Ex: 1
Coordination no.: 6 Structure: octahedral The ligand NH3 satisfies only secondary valency.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 9
Ex: 2
Coordination no.: 6 Structure: octahedral One Cl ion satisfies both primary and secondary valencies.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 10
Ex:3
Co-ordination no.: 6 Structure: octahedral Two Cl ions satisfy both primary and secondary valencies.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 11
Ex: 4
Co-ordination no.: 6 Structure: octahedral Three Cl ions satisfy both primary and secondary valencies.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 12
In Werner’s representation, dotted lines represent primary valency whereas thick lines represent secondary valency.

Some negative ligands, depending upon the complex, may satisfy both primary and secondary valencies. Such ligands do not ionise.

iv) Primary valencies are ionisable vale-ncies. Secondary valencies are non-ion- isable valencies.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 87.
Give the geometrical shapes of the following complex entities.
(i) [CO(NH3)6]3+
(ii) [Ni(CO)4]
(iii) [Pt Cl4]2- and
(iv) [Fe(CN)6]3-
Answer:
(i) [CO(NH3)6]3+ is octahedral with d2sp3 hybridisation.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 13

(ii) [Ni(CO)4] is tetrahedral with sp3 hybridisation.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 14

(iii) [Pt Cl4]-2 is square planar with dsp2 hybridisation.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 15

(iv) [Fe (CN)6]3- is octahedral with d2sp3 hybridisation.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 16

Question 88.
Explain the terms
i) Ligand
ii) Coordination number
iii) Coordination entity
iv) Central metal atom / ion.
Answer:
(i) Ligands:
The ions or molecules bound to the central atom / ion in the coordination entity are called ligands. Ligands are capable of donating electron pairs.
These may be simple ions such as Cl, small molecules such as H2O or NH3.

ii) The coordination number of a metal ion (CN) in a complex can be defined as the number of ligand donor atoms to which the metal is directly bonded. For example, in the complex ions [Pt Cl6]2- and [Ni (NH3)4]2+, the coordination number of Pt and Ni are 6 and 4 respectively.

Coordination number of the central atom/ion is determined only by the number of sigma bonds formed by the * ligand with the central atom/ion.

iii) Coordination entity :
A coordination entity constitutes, a central metal atom or ion bonded to a fixed number of ions or molecules. For example, [CoCl3 (NH3)3] is a coordination entity in which the cobalt ion is surrounded by three ammonia molecules and three chloride ions.

iv) Central atom/ion :
In a coordination entity, the atom/ion to which a fixed number of ions/groups are bound in a definite geometrical arrangement around it, is called the central atom or ion. In [NiCl2(H2O)4] central ion is Ni2+. In [Fe(CN)6]2-, central metal ion is Fe2+.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 89.
Explain the terms
i) unidentate ligand
ii) bidentate ligand
iii) polydentate ligand and
iv) ambidentate ligand giving one example for each.
Answer:
i) Unidentate ligand :
When a ligand is bound to a metal ion through a single donor atom as with Cl, H2O or NH3 the ligand is said to be unidentate.

ii) Bidentate ligand :
When a ligand is bound to a metal ion through two donor atoms as in ethylene diamine.
H2N CH2CH2NH2, the ligand is said to be bidentate.

iii) Polydentate ligand:
When several donor atoms are present in a single ligand [N(CH2CH2NH2)3] the ligand is said to be polydentate.
EDTA Ethylenediamine tetraacetate ion is an important hexadentate ligand.

iv) Ambidentate ligand:
Ligand which can ligate through two different atoms is called ambidentate ligand.
Examples are – NO2 and SCN ions. NO2 ion can coordinate either through nitrogen or through oxygen to a central metal atom/ion.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 17

Question 90.
What is meant by chelate effect ? Give example.
Answer:
When a di- or polydentate ligand uses its two or more donor atoms to bind a single metal ion, it is said to be a chelate ligand. Such complexes are called chelate com-plexes. They are more stable than similar complexes containing unidentate ligands.

The complexes formed by chelating ligands are more stable than their mono- dentate analogs. The effect is called chelate effect. Ex: [Cu (en)4]2+ is more stable than [Cu (NH3)4]2+ ion.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 18

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 91.
Give the oxidation numbers of the central metal atoms in the following complex entities.
(i) [Ni(CO)4]
(ii) [Co(NH3)6]3+
(iii) (Fe(CN)6]4- and
(iv) [Fe(C2O4)3]3-
Answer:
i) Oxidation number of Ni in Ni(CO)4 is zero.

ii) [Co(NH3)6]3+
Let the oxidation number of Co be x.
x + 0 = + 3
x = + 3

iii) [Fe(CN)6]4-
x – 6 = -4
x = 6 – 4 = +2
Ox. no. of Fe in [Fe(CN)0]4- is + 2

iv) [Fe(C2O4)3]3-
x – 6 = – 3 [C2O4 is bidenate ligand]
x = 6 – 3 = +3
Ox. no. of Fe in [Fe(C2O4)3]3- is + 3

Question 92.
Using IUPAC norms write the formulas for the following:
(i) Tetrahydroxozincate (II)
(ii) Hexaamminecobalt (III) sulphate
(iii) Potassium tetrachloropalladate (II) and
(iv) Potassium tri(oxalato) chromate (III)
Answer:
i) Tetrahydroxozincate (II) [Zn(OH)4]2-
ii) Hexammine cobalt (III) Sulphate [Co(NH3)6]2(SO4)3
iii) Potassium tetrachlorido palladate (II) K2[Pd Cl4]
iv) Potassium trioxalato chromate (III) K3 [Cr(C2O4)3]

Question 93.
Using IUPAC norms write the systematic names of the following:
(i) [C0(NH3)6]Cl3
(ii) [Pt(NH3)2Cl(NH2 CH3) Cl
(iii) [Ti(H2O)6]3+ and
(iv) [NiCl4]2-
Answer:
i) [C0(NH3)6]Cl3
Hexammine cobalt (III) chloride

ii) [Pt(NH3)2Cl(NH2 CH3) Cl diammine chloro methyl amino platinium (II) chloride.

iii) [Ti(H2O)6]3+
Hexahydro titanium (III) ion

iv) [NiCl4]2-
Tetra chloro Nickelate (II) ion

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 94.
Explain geometrical isomerism in coordination compounds giving suitable examples. [AP ’15]
Answer:
Stereo isomers have the same chemical for-mula and chemical bonds but they have different special arrangment.

Geometrical isomerism :
This type of iso-merism arises in heteroleptic complexes due to different possible geometric arrangements of the ligands.

In square planar complexes of formula MX2L2, the two ligands X may be arranged adjacent to each other in a cis isomer or opposite to each other in a trans isomer.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 19
Octahedral complexes of formula [MX2L4] in which two ligands X may be oriented cis or trans to each other.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 20
Tetrahedral complexes do not show geometrical isomerism because the rela-tive positions of the unidentate ligands attached to the central atom are the same respect to each other.

Question 95.
What are homoleptic and heteroleptic complexes ? Give one example for each.
Answer:
Complexes in which a metal is bound to only one kind of donor groups. Ex: [Co(NH3)6]3+, are known as homoleptic. Complexes in which a metal is bound to more than one. This type of isomerism arises in heteroleptic complexes due to different possible geometric arrangements of the ligands. Important examples of this behaviour are found with coordination numbers 4 and 6. In a square planar complex of formula [MX2L2] (X and L are unidentate), the two ligands X may be arranged adjacent to each other in a cis isomer, or opposite to each other in a trans isomer as depicted in the figure.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 21
Geometrical isomers (cis and trans) of [Co (NH3)4 Cl2]+

Other square planar complex of the type MABXL (where A, B, X, L are unidentates) shows three isomers-two cis and one trans. Such isomerism is not possible for a tetrahedral geometry but similar behaviour is possible in octahedral complexes of formula [MX2L2] in which the two ligands X may be oriented cis or trans to each other.
Geometrical Isomers of (CoCl2 (en)2]
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 22
Kind of donor groups. Ex : [Co (NH3)4 Cl2]+ are known as heteroleptic.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 96.
Explain giving reasons :
(i) Transition metals and many of their compounds show paramagnetic behaviour.
(ii) The enthalpies of atomisation of the transition meals are high.
(iii) The transition metal generally form coloured compounds.
(iv) Transition metals and their many compounds act as good catalysts.
Answer:
i) Transition metals and many of their compounds show paramagnetic behaviour :
Diamagnetic substances are repelled by the applied magnetic field while the paramagnetic substances are attracted. Many of the transition metal ions are paramagnetic.

Paramagnetism arises from the presence of unpaired electrons. Each such electron having a magnetic moment associated with its spin angular momentum and orbital angular momentum.

The magnetic moment is determined by the number of unpaired electrons and is calculated by using the spin only formula size.
µ = \(\sqrt{n(n+2)}\)
Where n is the number of unpaired electrons and µ is the magnetic moment in units of Bohr magneton (BM). A single unpaired electron has a magnetic moment of 1.73 Bohr magnetons. (BM).

ii) The enthalpies of atomisation of the transition metals are high :
The transition metals (with the exception of Zn, Cd and Hg) are very much hard and have low volatility. Their melting and boiling points are high. They have high enthalpies of atomisation the maxima at about the middle of each transition series indicate that one unpaired electron for d- orbital is particularly favourable for strong interatomic interaction. In general greater the number of valence electrons, stronger is the resultant bonding.

Metals with very high enthalphy of atomisation are noble in their reaction. The metals of the second and third series have higher values than the corresponding elements of first series. This accounts for the occurrence of more metal-metal bonding in compounds of the heavy transition metals.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 23
Trends in enthalpies of atomisation of transition elements

iii) The transition metals generally form coloured compounds:
The electron from a lower energy d-orbital of a metal ion in a complex is exited to a higher energy d-orbital of the same n value, the energy of excitation corresponds to the frequency of light absorbed. This frequency generally lies in the visible region. The colour observed corresponds to the com-plementary colour of the light absorbed. The frequency of the light absorbed is determined by the nature of the ligand. In aqueous solutions where water molecules are the ligands the ions exhibit different colours.
Ex: Cr3+ violet
Fe2+ green
Fe3+ yellow

iv) Transition metals and their many com-pounds act as good catalysts :
The transition metals and their compounds are known for their catalytic activity. This activity is due to their ability to adopt multiple oxidation states and to form complexes.
Eg: V2O5 in contact process.
Ni in Hydrogenation of oils.

Catalysts at a solid surface involve the formation of bonds b/w reactant molecules and atoms of the surface of the catalyst. This has the affect of increasing the con-centration of the reactants at the catalyst surface.
Eg : Iron (III) catalyses the reaction between Iodide and per sulphate ions.
2I + S2O82- → I2 + 2SO42-
An explanation of the catalytic action can be given as
2Fe3+ + 2I → 2Fe2+ + I2
2Fe2+ + S2O82- → 2Fe3+ + 2SO42-

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 97.
Describe the preparation of potassium permanganate. How does the acidified permanganate solution react with (I) Iron (“) Ions (II) SO2 and (iii) oxalic acid? Write
the Ionic equatIons.
Answer:
Potassium permanganate is prepared by the fusion of MnO2 with an alkali metal hydroxide and an oxidising agent like KNO3. This produces dark green K2MnO4 which disproportionates in a neutral or acidic solution to give permanganate.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 7

KMnO4 oxidises FeSO4 to Fe2(SO4)3,
2KMnO4 + 8H2SO4 + 10 FeSO4 → K2SO4 + 2 MnSO4 + 5 Fe2(SO4)3 + 8H2O
(or) 5 Fe2+ + \(\mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}\) + 8H+ → Mn2+ + 4H2O
+ 5Fe3+
II) Sulphurous acid is oxidised to sulphate or sulphuric acid,
5 \(\mathrm{SO}_3^{2-}\) + 2 \(\mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}\) + 6H+ → 2Mn++ + 3H2O + 5SO42-
III) It oxidises oxalic acid to CO2.
2KMnO4 + 3H2 SO4 + 5H2C2O4 → K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 8H2O – 10 CO2
(or) 5\(\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{O}_4^{2-}\) + 2\(\mathrm{MnO}_4^{-}\) + 16H+ → 2Mn2+ + 8H2O + 10CO2

Question 98.
Compare the chemistry of actinoids with that of the lanthanoids with special reference to:
(i) electronic configuration
(ii) oxidation state
(iii) atomic and ionic sizes and
(iv) chemical reactivity
Answer:

LanthanoidsActinoids
a) Electronic configuration 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2a) 5f1 – 146d0 – 1 7s2                   *
b) Oxidation states : They all show + 3 common state.
+ 2 is shown by Eu and Yb and
+ 4 by Ce and Tb.
b) They shows along with + 3, +4, + 5, +7 other oxidation states also.
c) Atomic size: Difference between the two successive lanthanoids sizes smaller than actinoid.c) Difference between the two successive actinoid is larger them lanthanoids.
d) Decrease in size in series is called lanthanoid contraction.d) Decrease in size in series is called actinoid contraction.
e) The ionisation enthalpies are high.e) Their ionisation enthalpies are lower than lanthanoids.
f) Their magnetic character is explained.f) Their magnetic characteristic cannot be explained.
g) They are non-radioactiVe (except promethium).g) All are radioactive.
h) When reacted with water form hydroxide and H2 gas.h) They form oxides and hydrides.
i) Reacts with non-metals at higher temperature.i) Reacts with non-metal at moderate temperature.

 

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 99.
How would you account for the following:
(i) Of the d4 species, Cr2+ is strongly reducing while manganese (III) is strongly oxidising.
(ii) Cobalt (U) is stable in aqueous solution but in the presence of complexing reagents it is easily oxidised.
(iii) The d1 configuration is very unstable in ions.
Answer:
i) Cr2+ is reducing as its configuration changes from d4 to d3. In d3 the t2g level is half-filled. On the otherhand, the change from Mn2+ to Mn3+ results in the half- filled (d5) configuration which has extra stability.

ii) Cobalt (II) is stable in aqueous solution, but in the presence of complexing reagents, it is easily oxidised.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 24
In the presence of complexing agents electron pairs takes place, and t2g orbital is completely filled.

Hence cobalt (II) is oxidised to cobalt (III).

Practically, all complexes of Co (+ III) have six ligands in an octahedral arrangements.
The metal has a d6 configuration and most of the ligands are strong enough to cause spin pairing, giving the electronic arrangement (t2g)6 (eg)0. This arrangement has a very large crystal field stabilisation energy. Such complexes are diamagnetic.
Eg: [Co (NH3)6]3+
The one exception is [C0F6]3- which is a high spin complex and is paramagnetic.

iii) The d’, configuration is very unstable in ions.
The d’, configuration has lower CFSE value. Hence very unstable.

Question 100.
Give examples and suggest reasons for the following features of the transition metals.
(i) The lowest oxide of transition metal is basic, the highest is amphoteric / acidic.
(ii) A transition metal exhibits highest oxidation state in oxides and fluorides.
(iii) The highest oxidation state is exhibited in oxoanions of a metal.
Answer:
i) The lowest oxide of transition metal is basic, the highest is amphoteric/acidic:
Lowest oxidation compounds of transition metals are basic due to their ability to get oxidised to higher states. Whereas the higher oxidation state of metal and compounds gets reduced to lower ones and hence acts as acidic in nature.

ii) A transition metal exhibits highest oxidation state in oxides and fluorides:
Due to high electronegativities of oxygen and fluorine, the oxides and fluorides of transition metals exhibits highest oxidation state.

iii) In oxo anions of metals, the metals form bonds with oxygen and hence present in their highest oxidation states. For example, Cr forms CrO42- and Cr2O72- both contain chromium in + 6 state. Permanganate ion, MnO4 contains Mn in its highest oxidation state of + 7.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 101.
Compare the chemistry of the actinoids with that of lanthanoids with reference to:
(i) eletronic configuration
(ii) oxidation states and
(iii) chemical reactivity
Answer:

LanthanoidsActinoids
a) Electronic configuration 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2a) 5f1 – 146d0 – 1 7s2                   *
b) Oxidation states : They all show + 3 common state.
+ 2 is shown by Eu and Yb and
+ 4 by Ce and Tb.
b) They shows along with + 3, +4, + 5, +7 other oxidation states also.
c) Atomic size: Difference between the two successive lanthanoids sizes smaller than actinoid.c) Difference between the two successive actinoid is larger them lanthanoids.
d) Decrease in size in series is called lanthanoid contraction.d) Decrease in size in series is called actinoid contraction.
e) The ionisation enthalpies are high.e) Their ionisation enthalpies are lower than lanthanoids.
f) Their magnetic character is explained.f) Their magnetic characteristic cannot be explained.
g) They are non-radioactiVe (except promethium).g) All are radioactive.
h) When reacted with water form hydroxide and H2 gas.h) They form oxides and hydrides.
i) Reacts with non-metals at higher temperature.i) Reacts with non-metal at moderate temperature.

 

Question 102.
Explain IUPAC nomenclature of coordination compounds with suitable examples.
Answer:
The rules which are to be followed while writing down the names of the coordinate compounds are –

  1. The cationic part of the coordinate of compound Is written first followed by the names of the anion with a small gap.
  2. Within a coordination sphere, ligands names are written in alphabetical order before the name of the central metal atom or ion without leaving any gap.
  3. To indicate thenumber of ligands in the coordination sphere two types of prefixes are used-
    a) One are di-tri-tetra – etc. These are used when the ligands names are simple.
    b) If the ligands names are complex and contains the prefixes, like di-tri-tetra etc. in their names, then pre-fixes-bis, tris, tetrakis, etc. are used.
  4. The names of anionic ligands (both organic and inorganic) ends with-O-. If a ligands name is already having prefix its name is enclosed in simple brackets.
    Neutral and cationic ligands names are written as such except – water (-aqua), NH3 (-ammine), -Co (-Carbonyl) and NO (Nitrosyl).
  5. The oxidation state of the central atom or ion is indicated in Roman numerates after the name of the central metal atom in simple brackets with no gap in between.
  6. When coordination sphere is an anion then -ate is added as suffix to the name of the central metal atom / ion.
  7. Prefixes cis and trans are used to desig-nate adjacent and opposite geometrical locations of the ligands in a complex.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 103.
Explain different types of isomerism exhibited by coordination compounds, giving suitable examples.
Answer:
Esorners are two or more compounds that have the same chemical formula but a different arrangement of atoms. Because of the different arrangement of atoms, they differ in one or more physical or chemical properties. Two principal types of Isomerism are known among coordination compounds. Each of which can be further subdivided.

a) Stereoisomerism.

  1. Geometrical isomerism
  2. Optical isomerism

b) Structural isomerism

  1. Linkage isomerism
  2. Coordination isomerism
  3. Ionisation isomerism
  4. Solvate isomerism

Stereo isomers have the same chemical formula and chemical bonds but they have different spatial arragement. Structural isomers have different bonds. A detailed account of these isomers are given below.
Geometric isomerism:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 25
Geometrical isomers (cis and trans) of [Pt (NH3)2 Cl2]
This type of isomerism also arises when bidentate ligands L – L (eg : NH2 CH2 CH2 NH2(en)] are present in complexes of formula [MX2 (L – L)2].

Another type of isomerism occurs in octahedral coordination entities of the type [Ma3b3] like [Co (NH3)3 (NO2)3]. If three donor atoms of the same ligands occupy adjacent positions at the corner of an octachedral face, we have facial (fac) isomer.

When positions are around the meridian of octahedron, we get the meridional isomer.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 26
Optical isomerism:
Optical isomers are the mirror images that cannot be super imposed on one another. These are called as enantiomers. The molecules (or) ions that cannot be superimposible are called chiral. The two forms are called dextro & laevo forms depending on the direction
they rotate plane polarised light in a polarimeter. {d-rotates to right & / to left}.
Optical isomers (d and l) of [Co (en)3]3+
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 27
Optical isomerism is commmon in octahedral complexes involving different ligands.

In a coordination utility of the [Pt Cl2 [en]2]2+ only cis-isomer shows optical activity.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 28
Optical isomers of [d and l] of cis [Pt Cl2 (en)2]2+

Linkage isomerism :
Linkage isomerism arise in a coordination compound containing ambidentate ligand.

A simple example is provided by complexes containing the thiocyanate ligand, NCS, which may bind through the nitrogen to give M – NCS are through sulphur to give M-SCN.
Example : [Co(NH2)5 (NO2)] C l2

Which is obtained as the red form, in which the nitrite ligand is bond through oxygen (-ONO) and as the yellow form in which the nitrite ligand is bond through nitrogen (-NO2).

Ionisation isomerism:
This type of isomerism is shown by such compounds which have same composition but literate different ions in solution. In such isomers, the positions of groups within or outside coordination sphere differs.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 29
Coordination isomerism: This type of isomerism arises from the interchange of ligands between cationic and anionic entities of different metal ions present in a complex.
Ex : [CoCNH3)6] [Cr(CN)6] and [Cr(NH3)6] [Co (CN)6]

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 104.
Discuss the nature of bonding and magnetic behaviour in the following coordination entities on the basis of valence bond theory.
(i) [Fe(CN)6]4-
(ii) [FeF6]3-
(iii) [Co(C2O4)3]3- and
(iv) [CoF6]3-
Answer:
i) [Fe(CN)6]4-:
In this complex ion, iron is in +2 oxidation state. The electronic configuration of Fe [Z = 26] is 4s2 3d6.

The configuration of Fe2+ is 3d6. Thus the ion has four vacant orbitals, one s and three p. In order to make six vacant orbitals available, the electrons in 3d orbital are forced to pair up. d2 sp3 hybridisation takes place clearly, six pairs of electrons one from each CN- ion occupy six vacant hybrid orbitals.
i) [Fe(CN)6]4-
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 30
Geometry : The complex ion is octahedral. After the complex ion formation, no unpaired electron is left. Thus the given ion is diamagnetic.

ii) [FeF6]3- : Oxidation state of Fe = + 3 Fe3+ 3d5 4s0
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 31
As six F ion approaches, no pairing of electron occur and the sp3d2 hybridisation occurs accommodate six F ions.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 32
Since five unpaired electrons are available, it is paramagnetic. Geometry is octahedral.

iii) [Co(C2O4)3]3-: Oxidation state of Co is +3
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 33
As didentate oxalate ions approach, pairing takes places.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 34
All electrons are paired. The substance is diamagnetic octahedral.

iv) [CoF6]3-: Oxidation state of Co is + 3.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 35
As there are four unpaired electrons, the complex is paramagnetic in nature.

Question 105.
Sketch the splitting of d-orbitals in an octahedral crystal field.
Answer:
The field created by the anionic ligands or due to the polarity of neutral molecules is called crystal field. The crystal field distorts the symmetry of the central metal atom / ion and splitting of d-orbitals takes places.

It the six ligands of octahedral complex are approaching the central metal atom/ion along the cartesian axes, initially the energy of the orbitals is increased. Then the orbital lying along the axis (dx2,/sup> – y2 & dz2) gets repelled strongly by the approaching crystal fields, then dxy, dyz, dzx orbitals which lie in between the axes.

The energy of dx2,/sup> – y2 & dz2 orbitals gets increase whereas energy of the other three gets lowered relative to the average energy of the spherical crystal field.

The lower energy set of d-orbitals is called t2g and the higher energy set is called eg. The energy of separation is called crystal field stabilisation energy.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 36

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 106.
What is spectrochemical series ? Explain the difference between a weak field ligand and a strong field ligand.
Answer:
The magnitude of crystal field splitting ∆0, depends upon the field produced by the ligand and charge on the metal ion. Some * ligands are able to produce strong fields in which case, the splitting will be large whereas others produce weak fields and consequently result in small splitting of d orbitals.

In general, ligands can be arranged in a series in the order of increasing field strength as given below:
I < Br < S2- < SCN < Cl < N3-< F < OH < C2O42- < H2O < NCS < NH3 < en < CN < Co
Such a series is termed as spectra chemical series. It is an experimentally determined series based on the absorption of light by complexes with different ligands.

Ligands for which the crystal filed stabilisation energy is less than the pairing energy are called weak field ligands. These ligands result in the formation of high spin complexes.
0 < p
Ligands for which the crystal field stabilisation energy is greater than the pairing energy are called strong field ligands. These ligands results in the formation of low spin complexes.
0 >p
In oxoanions of metals, the metals form bonds with oxygen and hence are present in their highest oxidation states. For example, Cr form CrO42- and Cr2O72-, both contains chromium ion + 6 oxidation state.
Permanganate ion, MnO4 contains Mn in its highest oxidation state of +7.

Question 107.
Discuss the nature of bonding in metal carbonyls.
Answer:
Metal carbonyls are formed by most of the transition metals. These carbonyls have simple well defined structure, tetra carbonyl nickel (O) is tetrahedral, pentacarbonyl- iron (O) is trigonal bipyramidal while hexa- carbonyl chromium (O) is octahedral. (O) indicates zero oxidation state.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 37
The metal carbon bond in metal carboynyls posses both σ and π character. The MC σ bond is formed by the donation of lone pair of electrons on the carbonyl carbon into a vacant orbital of the metal. The M – C π bond is formed by the donation of a pair of electrons from a filled d-orbital of metal into the vacant antibonding π orbital of carbon monoxide. The metal to ligand bonding creates a synergic effect which strengthens the bond between CO and the metal.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compoundss

Question 108.
Explain the applications of coordination compounds in different fields.
Answer:
1) Coordination compounds find use in many qualitative and quantitative chemical analysis. Examples of such reagents include EDTA, DMG (dimethylglyoxime), d-nitroso-β-naphthol, cupron, etc.

2) Hardness of water is estimated- by simple titration with Na2EDTA the Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions form table complexes with EDTA.

3) Some important extraction processes of metals, like those of silver and gold, make use of complex formation. Gold, for example, combines with cyanide in the presence of oxygen and. water to form the coordination entity [Au(CN)2] in aqueous solution. Gold can be separated in metal is form from this solution by the addition of Zinc.

4) Coordination compounds are of great importance in biological systems. The pigment responsible for photosynthesis, chlorophyll, is a coordination compound of magnesium. Haemoglobin the red pigment of blood which acts as oxygen carrier is a coordination compound of iron. Vitamin B12, Cyanocobalamine, the anti- pernicious anaemia factor, is a coordination compound of cobalt.

5) Coordination compounds are used as catalysts for many industrial processes. Examples include rhodium complex, [(Ph3P)3 RhCl], a Wilkinson catalyst, is used for the hydrogenation of alkenes.

6) Articles can be electroplated with silver and gold much more smoothly and evenly from solutions of the complexes, [Ag(CN)2] and [Au(CN)2] than from a solution of simple metal ions.

7) In black and white photography, the developed film is fixed by washing with hyposolution which dissolves the undercomposed Ag Br to form a complex ion, [Ag (S2O3)2]3 EDTA is used in the treatment of lead poisoning.

TS Inter 1st Year English Study Material Telangana | TS Intermediate 1st Year English Textbook Solutions Pdf

Here you will find Telangana TSBIE State Board Syllabus TS Inter 1st Year English Study Material, Keep Going Interactive English Intermediate 1st Year English Textbook Solutions Pdf Download according to the latest exam curriculum. The chapter-wise TS Inter 1st Year Study Material will allow students to practice a wide range of questions, which will help them gain more knowledge and develop control over the subject.

TS Intermediate 1st Year English Study Material Pdf Download | TS Inter 1st Year English Textbook Solutions Telangana

Here, the students can access the links of chapter-wise Keep Going Interactive English Intermediate First Year English Textbook Solutions Pdf Download provides answers to all the textbook questions in simple language with the main aim of helping students ace the examinations.

TS Inter 1st Year English Textbook Answers

TS Intermediate 1st Year English Textbook Solutions – Poetry

Inter 1st Year English Textbook Answers Telangana – Prose

TS Inter 1st Year English Short Stories

TS Inter 1st Year English Reading Comprehension

TS Inter 1st Year English Grammar with Answers

TS Inter 1st Year English Revision Tests I-V

  • Revision Test-I
  • Revision Test-II
  • Revision Test-III
  • Revision Test-IV
  • Revision Test-V

We hope this TS Intermediate 1st Year English Textbook Solutions Pdf Download will be useful for students to get an idea of answering textbook questions efficiently. If there is any trouble in grasping the concepts related to TS Inter 1st Year English Textbook Answers Telangana, drop your questions in the comment and we will get back to you with a solution in time.

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type

Students must practice these Maths 2B Important Questions TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Evaluate \(\int_0^{\pi / 2} \frac{a \sin x+b \cos x}{\sin x+\cos x} d x\). [(AP) May ’17]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q1.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q1.2

Question 2.
Evaluate \(\int_{-\pi / 2}^{\pi / 2} \frac{\cos x}{1+e^x} d x\). [(TS) May ’17]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q2.1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type

Question 3.
Evaluate \(\int_0^\pi \frac{1}{3+2 \cos x} d x\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q3
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q3.1

Question 4.
Evaluate \(\int_{-3}^3\left(9-x^2\right)^{3 / 2} d x\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q4
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q4.1

Question 5.
Evaluate \(\int_{-a}^a x^2\left(a^2-x^2\right)^{3 / 2} d x\). [(TS) May ’17]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q5
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q5.1

Question 6.
Evaluate \(\int_0^4\left(16-x^2\right)^{5 / 2} d x\). [(AP) May ’19]
Solution:
Put x = 4 sin θ
dx = 4 cos θ dθ
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q6

Question 7.
Evaluate \(\int_0^2\left(x^2+1\right) d x\) as the limit of a sum.
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q7
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q7.1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type

Question 8.
Evaluate \({Lt}_{n \rightarrow \infty} \sum_{i=1}^n \frac{i^3}{i^4+n^4}\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q8
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q8.1

Question 9.
Evaluate \(\underset{n \rightarrow \infty}{L t}\left[\left(1+\frac{1}{n}\right)\left(1+\frac{2}{n}\right) \ldots\left(1+\frac{n}{n}\right)\right]^{1 / n}\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q9
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q9.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q9.2

Question 10.
Evaluate \({Lt}_{n \rightarrow \infty}\left[\left(1+\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\left(1+\frac{2^2}{n^2}\right) \cdots\left(1+\frac{n^2}{n^2}\right)\right]^{1 / n}\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q10
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q10.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q10.2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q10.3

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type

Question 11.
Find the area bounded between the curves y2 = 4x, y2 = 4(4 – x). [(TS) May ’19, ’11]
Solution:
Given curves are y2 = 4x
⇒ y = 2√x ………(1)
y2 = 4(4 – x) ………(2)
⇒ y = \(\sqrt{4(4-x)}\)
Solving (1) and (2)
4x = 4(4 – x)
⇒ x = 4 – x
⇒ 2x = 4
⇒ x = 2
from (1) ⇒ y = ± 2√2
Points of Intersections of (1) and (2) are A = (2, 2√2) and B = (2, -2√2)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q11
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q11.1

Question 12.
Find the area enclosed between y = x2 – 5x and y = 4 – 2x.
Solution:
Given curves are
y = x2 – 5x ………(1)
y = 4 – 2x ………..(2)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q12
Solving (1) and (2)
x2 – 5x = 4 – 2x
⇒ x2 – 3x – 4 = 0
⇒ (x – 4) (x + 1) = 0
∴ x = 4 and x = -1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q12.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q12.2

Question 13.
Find the area enclosed between the curves y = 4x – x2, y = 5 – 2x. [(TS) Mar. ’16]
Solution:
Given curves are
y = 4x – x2 ………(1)
y = 5 – 2x ………(2)
Solving (1) and (2)
4x – x2 = 5 – 2x
⇒ x2 – 6x + 5 = 0
⇒ x2 – 5x – x + 5 = 0
⇒ x(x – 5) – 1(x – 5) = 0
⇒ x = 1 or 5
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q13
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q13.1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type

Question 14.
Find the area between the parabolas y2 = 4x and x2 = 4y. [(AP) Mar. ’20; (TS) ’17; May ’14]
Solution:
Given equations of curves are
y2 = 4x ………(1)
and x2 = 4y ……..(2)
Solving (1) and (2) the points of intersection can be obtained.
y2 = 4x
⇒ y4 = 16x2
⇒ y4 = 64y
⇒ y = 4
∴ 4x = y2
⇒ 4x = 16
⇒ x = 4
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q14
Points of intersection are (0, 0) and (4, 4).
∴ The area bounded between the parabolas
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L1 Q14.1

Question 15.
Evaluate \(\int_0^2 e^x d x\) as the limit of the sum.
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q1

Question 16.
Evaluate \(\int_0^4\left(x+e^{2 x}\right) d x\) as the limit of a sum.
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q2.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q2.2

Question 17.
Evaluate \(\int_0^{16} \frac{x^{1 / 4}}{1+x^{1 / 2}} d x\)
Solution:
L.C.M of 2, 4 is 4
Put x = t4
⇒ dx = 4t3 dt
L.L: x = 0 ⇒ t = 0
U.L: x = 16 ⇒ t = 2
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q3
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q3.1

Question 18.
Evaluate \(\int_0^{\pi / 4} \log (1+\tan x) d x\). [(AP) Mar. ’19, ’16; May ’18, (TS) ’16]
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q4
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q4.1

Question 19.
Evaluate \(\underset{n \rightarrow \infty}{L t} \frac{1}{n}\left[\tan \frac{\pi}{4 n}+\tan \frac{2 \pi}{4 n}+\ldots \ldots+\tan \frac{n \pi}{2 n}\right]\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q5

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type

Question 20.
Find \({Lt}_{n \rightarrow \infty}\left(\frac{n !}{n^n}\right)^{1 / n}\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q6
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q6.1

Question 21.
Evaluate \(\int_0^5 x^3\left(25-x^2\right)^{7 / 2} d x\)
Solution:
Put x = 5 sin θ, then dx = 5 cos θ dθ
L.L: x = 0 ⇒ θ = 0
U.L: x = 5 ⇒ θ = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q7

Question 22.
Evaluate \(\int_0^2 x \sqrt{2-x} d x\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q8

Question 23.
Find \(\int_0^1 x^{3 / 2} \sqrt{1-x} d x\)
Solution:
Put x = sin2θ then dx = 2 sin θ cos θ dθ
Lower limit: x = 0 ⇒ θ = 0
Upper limit: x = 1 ⇒ θ = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q9

Question 24.
Evaluate \(\int_0^1 \sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{2 x}{1+x^2}\right) d x\)
Solution:
Put x = tan θ, then θ = tan-1x
dx = sec2θ dθ
L.L: x = 0 ⇒ θ = 0
U.L: x = 1 ⇒ θ = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q10
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q10.1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type

Question 25.
Evaluate \(\int_0^1 x \tan ^{-1} x d x\)
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q11
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q11.1

Question 26.
Find the area enclosed by the curves y = 3x and y = 6x – x2.
Solution:
Given curves are
y = 3x ……..(1)
y = 6x – x2 ………(2)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q12
Solving (1) and (2)
3x = 6x – x2
⇒ x2 = 3x
⇒ x(x – 3) = 0
⇒ x = 0 and x = 3
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q12.1

Question 27.
Find the area bounded between the curves y = 4x – x2, y = 5 – 2x.
Solution:
Given curves are
y = 4x – x2 ……..(1)
y = 5 – 2x ……..(2)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q13
Solving (1) and (2)
4x – x2 = 5 – 2x
⇒ x2 – 6x + 5 = 0
⇒ (x – 1) (x – 5) = 0
⇒ x = 1, x = 5
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q13.1

Question 28.
Find the area bounded between the curves y = 2 – x, y = x2. [Mar. ’01]
Solution:
Given curves are
y = 2 – x2 ……(1)
y = x2 ………(2)
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q14
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q14.1

TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type

Question 29.
Find the area of the region enclosed by the curves y = sin x, y = cos x, x = 0, x = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\).
Solution:
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q15
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q15.1
TS Inter Second Year Maths 2B Definite Integrals Important Questions Short Answer Type L2 Q15.2

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 8th Lesson Polymers Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 8th Lesson Polymers

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Define the terms monomer and polymer.
Answer:
Monomer : The repeating structural unit of a macromolecule is called monomer.
Polymer : A polymer is defined as a very large molecule having high molecular mass.

Question 2.
What are polymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Polymers are very large molecules having high molecular mass which are formed by linking together repeating units of small molecules called monomers.
Ex: Polythene.

Question 3.
What is polymerisation? Give an example of polymerisation reaction. maim
Answer:
The process of formation of a polymer from its monomer(s) is called polymerisation.
Ex: The formation of polythene from ethene.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 4.
Give one example each for synthetic and semisynthetic polymers.
Answer:
Polythene is an example for synthetic polymers.
Cellulose acetate (rayon) is an example for semi synthetic polymers.

Question 5.
How are the polymers classified on the basis of structure ?
Answer:
On the basis of structure, polymers are clas-sified into 1) linear polymers, 2) branched chain polymers and 3) cross linked or net-work polymers.

Question 6.
Give one example each for linear and branched chain polymers.
Answer:
Polythene is an example for linear polymers. Low density polythene is an example for branched chain polymers.

Question 7.
What are cross linked (or network) polymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Polymers formed from bi-functional and tri-functional monomers and contain strong covalent bonds between various linear polymer chains are called cross linked (or network) polymers.
Ex: Bakelite.

Question 8.
What is addition polymer ? Give example.
Answer:
A polymer formed by the repeated addition of monomer molecules possessing double or triple bonds is called an addition polymer.
Ex: Polythene formed from ethene.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 9.
What is condensation polymer ? Give example.
Answer:
A polymer formed by the repeated condensation reaction between two different bi-functional or tri-functional monomeric species is called a condensation polymer.
Ex : Nylon 6, 6.

Question 10.
What are homopolymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Addition polymers formed by the polymerisation of a single monomeric species are called homopolymers.
Ex: Polythene.

Question 11.
What are copolymers ? Give example. [IPE 14]
Answer:
Polymers formed by addition polymerisation of two different monomeric species are called copolymers.
Ex : Buna – S.

Question 12.
Is -[-CH2-CH(C6H5)-]n– a homopolymer or a copolymer ?
Answer:
Polystyrene, -[-CH2-CH(C6H5)-]n– is a homopolymer.

Question 13.
Is -(NH-CHR-CO)n – a homopolymer or a copolymer ?
Answer:
-(NH-CHR-CO)n – is a homopolymer.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 14.
What are the classes of the polymers based on molecular forces ?
Answer:
Based on molecular forces polymers are classified into

  1. Elastomers,
  2. Fibres,
  3. Thermoplastic polymers and
  4. Thermosetting polymers.

Question 15.
What are elastomers ? Give example.
Answer:
Elastomers are rubber like solids with elastic properties.
Ex : Buna – S.

Question 16.
What are fibres ? Give example.
Answer:
Fibres are the thread forming solids which possess high tensile strength and high modulus.
Ex: Terylene.

Question 17.
What are thermoplastic polymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Thermoplastic polymers are the linear or slightly branched long chain molecules capable of softening on heating and harden-ing oil cooling.
Ex: Polystyrene.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 18.
What are thermosetting polymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Thermosetting plastics are cross linked or heavily branched molecules which on heat-ing undergo extensive cross linking in moulds and again become infusible.
Ex: Bakelite.

Question 19.
Write the name and structure of one of the common initiators used in free radical polymerisation reaction.
Answer:
Benzoyl peroxide is a common initiator used in free radical polymerisation reaction.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 1

Question 20.
How can you differentiate between addition and condensation polymerisation ?
Answer:
Addition polymerisation involves repeated addition of monomer molecules possessing double or triple bonds where as condensation polymerisation involves repeated con-densation between two different bi-functio-nal or tri-functional monomeric species.

Question 21.
What is Ziegler – Natta catalyst ?
Answer:
Trialkyl aluminium and titanium tetra chloride is called Ziegler – Natta catalyst.

Question 22.
How is Dacron obtained from ethylene glycol and terepthalic acid ?
Answer:
Dacron (Terylene) is obtained by the con. densation polymerisation of ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 23.
What are the repeating monomeric units of Nylon 6 and Nylon 6,6 ? [Mar. 18, 15 ; TS]
Answer:
Name of the polymer
Nylon 6
Nylon 6, 6

Repeating unit
Caprolactum
Hexa methylene
diamine and
adipic acid

Question 24.
What is the difference between Buna – N and Buna – S ?
Answer:
Buna – S is obtained by the copolymerisation of 1, 3 – butadiene and styrene whereas Buna – N is obtained by the copolymerisation of 1, 3 butadiene and acrylonitrile. Buna – N is more resistant to solvents but less abrasion resistant them Buna – S.

Question 25.
Arrange the following polymers in increasing order of their molecular forces.
i) Nylon 6, 6, Buna – S, Polythene
ii) Nylon 6, Neoprene, Polyvinyl chloride
Answer:
i) Buna – S < Polythene < Nylon 6, 6
ii) Neoprene < Polyvinyl chloride < Nylon 6

Question 26.
Identify the monomer in the following polymeric structures.
i) -[-C-(CH2)8 – C – NH – (CH2)6 – NH – ]-
ii) -[-NH – CO – NH – CH2 -]n
Answer:
i) HOOC – (CH2)8 – COOH + H2N – (CH2)6 – NH2
ii) H2N – CO – NH2 + HCHO

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 27.
Name the different types of molecular masses of polymers.
Answer:

  1. Number average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\))
  2. Weight average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\))

Question 28.
What is PDI (Poly Dispersity Index) ? [AP Mar. 19]
Answer:
The ratio between weight average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\)) and number average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\)) of a polymer is called Poly Dispersity Index (PDI).
PDI = \(\frac{\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}}{\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}}\)

Question 29.
What is vulcanization of rubber ? [TS Mar. 19; (TS 16, 15)]
Answer:
Vulcanization is the process of heating raw rubber (latex) with sulphur and an appropriate additive at a temperature range between 373 K to 415 K.

Question 30.
What is the cross linking agent used in the manufacture of tyre rubber ?
Answer:
5% of sulphur is used as the cross linking agent in the manufacture of tyre rubber.

Question 31.
What is biodegradable polymer? Give one example of a biodegradable polyester ? [Mar. 2018-AP]
Answer:
Polymers which undergo environmental degradation are called biodegradable polymers.
Ex : Nylon 2 – nylon 6.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 32.
What is PHBV ? How is it useful to man ? [AP Mar. 19; (Mar. 18-TS) AP 16 ; TS 16, 15]
Answer:
PHBV stands for Poly β-hydroxybutyrate – co-β-hydroxy valerate. It is used in speciality packaging, orthopaedic devices and in controlled release of drugs.

Question 33.
Give the structure of Nylon 2 – nylon 6 ?
Answer:
The structure of Nylon 2 – Nylon 6 is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 2

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 34.
Classify the following into addition and condensation polymers.
i) Terylene
ii) Bakelite
iii) Polyvinyl chloride
iv) Polythene,
Answer:
i) Terylene is a condensation polymer.
ii) Bakelite is a condensation polymer.
iii) Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) is an addition polymer.
iv) Polythene is an addition polymer.

Question 35.
How do you explain the functionality of a polymer?
Answer:
The functionality of a polymer depends upon its unique mechanical properties like tensile strength, elasticity, toughness etc. These mechanical properties are governed by intermolecular forces e.g., van der Waals forces and hydrogen bonds present in the molecule. These forces also bind the polymer chains.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 36.
Distinguish between the terms homopolymer and copolymer. Give one example of each.
Answer:
Homopolymers are addition polymers formed by the polymerisation of a single monomeric species whereas copolymers are addition polymers formed by the polymerisation of two different monomeric species.
Ex: Polythene is an example for homopolymers.
Buna – S is an example for copolymers.

Question 37.
Define thermoplastics and thermosetting polymers with two examples of each.
Answer:
Thermoplastics :
Thermoplastics are the linear or slightly branched long chain molecules capable of softening on heating and hardening on cooling.
Examples: Polythene and polystyrene.

Thermosetting polymers:
Thermosetting polymers are the cross linked or heavily branched molecules which on heating undergo extensive cross linking in moulds and again become infusible.
Examples: Bakelite and urea-formaldehyde resins.

Question 38.
Explain copolymerization with an example.
Answer:
Copolymerisation is a polymerisation reaction in which a mixture of different types of monomeric species are allowed to polymerise and form a copolymer.
Ex; Buna – S, copolymer is formed when a mixture of 1,3 – Butadiene and styrene is allowed to polymerise.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 3

Question 39.
Explain free radical mechanism for the polymerization of ethene.
Answer:
Polymerisation of ethene to polythene consists of heating or exposing to light a mixture of ethene with a small amount of benzoyl peroxide initiator. Phenyl free radical is formed by benzoyl peroxide. The polymerisation process starts with the addition of phenyl free radical to the ethene double bond thus generating a new and larger free radical.

This step is called chain initiating step. This radical then reacts with another molecule of ethene and the repetition of this sequence carries the reaction forward. Ultimately at some stage the product radical thus formed reacts with another radical to form the polymerised product. This step is called the chain terminating step.
Chain initiation step:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 4

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 40.
Write the names and structures of the monomers used for getting the following polymers. [AP 16; IPE 14]
i) Polyvinyl chloride
ii) Teflon
iii) Bakelite
iv) Polystyrene.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 5

Question 41.
Write the names and structures of the monomers of the following polymers
i) Buna – S
ii) Buna – N
iii) Dacron
iv) Neoprene.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 6

Question 42.
What is natural rubber? How does it exhi-bit elastic properties ?
Answer:
Natural rubber is a polymer and exhibits elastic properties.

Natural rubber may be considered as a linear polymer of isoprene and is also called cis-1,4 – polyisoprene. The cis-polyisoprene molecule consists of various chains held together by weak van der Waal’s forces and has colloidal structure. Thus it stretches like a spring and exhibits elastic properties.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 43.
Explain the purpose of vulcanization of rubber.
Answer:
Many properties of natural rubber limit its use. It becomes soft at high temperature (> 335 K) and brittle at low temperatures (< 283 K). It shows water absorption. It is soluble in non-polar solvents and is non- resistant to attack by oxidising agents. The purpose of vulcanization is to improve upon these physical properties.

Question 44.
Explain the difference between natural rubber and synthetic rubber.
Answer:
Natural rtibber is harvested from rubber trees. Synthetic rubber is man made.

Synthetic rubbers have same properties of natural rubber including being water proof and elastic, but they have same improved properties also – they are tougher more fle-xible and more durable than natural rubber. Natural rubber is soluble in non-polar sol-vents and is non-resistant to attack by oxid-ising agents. Synthetic rubber is resistant to the action of solvents and oxidising agents.

Question 45.
How does the presence of double bonds in rubber molecules influence their structure and reactivity ?
Answer:
The double bonds in rubber polymer provide the reactive sites and also determine the configuration of the polymer. Vulcanisation takes place at these reactive sites and sulphur forms cross links at these sites. Thus rubber gets stiff.

Question 46.
What are LDP and HDP ? How are they formed ?
Answer:
LDP and HDP stands for Low Density Polythene and High Density Polythene respectively.

LDP is obtained by the polymerisation of ethene under high pressure of 1000 to 2000 atmospheres at a temperature of 350 to 570 K in the presence of traces of peroxide initiator.

HDP is obtained by the addition polyme-risation of ethene in a hydrocarbon solvent in the presence of a catalyst such as triethyl aluminium and titanium tetrachloride (Ziegler – Natta catalyst) at a temperature of 333 K to 343 K and under a pressure of 6 – 7 atmospheres.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 47.
What are natural and synthetic polymers ? Give two examples of each type.
Answer:
Polymers obtained from natural sources such as plants and animals are called natural polymers.
Ex: Cellulose, rubber.

Man-made polymers are called synthetic polymers.
Ex : Polythene, Buna – N.

Question 48.
Write notes on different types of molecular masses of polymers.
Answer:
A polymer sample contains chains of varying lengths and hence its molecular mass is always expressed as an average. The average molecular masses of polymers are expressed in different ways. The important among them are:

  1. Number average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\))
  2. Weight average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\) )

Number average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\)) :
Polymer may be thought of as a mixture of molecules of same chemical type but of different masses. The particles of the polymer may be monomers, dimers or…. polymers. Let us suppose that there are N1 particles each of mass M1. Similarly there are N2 particles each of mass M2 …. and let N1 be the number of particles each of mass M1. Then
Total mass of the polymer sample
= M1N1 + M2N2 + M3N3 + …………. + MiNi
= \(\sum_{n=1}^{\mathrm{i}}\) MiNi
Total number of particles in the system = N1 + N2 + N3 + …………….. + Ni
= \(\sum_{n=1}^{\mathrm{i}}\) Ni
Number average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 7
The number average molecular mass depends upon the number of molecules present in the polymer.

Weight average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\)) :
The weight average molecular mass is calculated as follows.

The molecular mass of each type of particle is multiplied by the contribution of the species to the total weight of the sample. The product is calculated for each of the species present. The sum of the products of the species present in the sample is known as the weight average molecular mass of the polymer.

Let there be Ni particles each of mass Mi. Then
Total weight of all the particles
= M1N1 + M2N2 + ………….. + MiNi = \(\sum_{n=1}^{\mathrm{i}}\) Mi Ni
Mass of Nj particles each of mass M1 = N1M1
The fraction of the total mass contributed by each particle of this type = \(\frac{M_1 N_1}{\sum_{n=1}^i M_i N_i}\)
This fraction is multiplied by the molecular mass M1. We get
\(\frac{M_1 N_1}{\sum_{n=1}^i M_i N_i} \times M_1=\frac{N_1 M_1^2}{\sum_{n=1}^i N_i M_i}\)
Similarly this can be worked out for other species also. Sum of the products of the molecular mass and the fraction of the total mass of the respective species gives the weight average molecular mass.
\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\) = \(\frac{\sum_{n=1}^i N_i M_i^2}{\sum_{n=1}^i N_i M_i}\)
Note : Both \(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\) have no units.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 49.
Write an essay on
i) Addition polymerization and
ii) Condensation polymerization.
Answer:
Addition polymerisation : The type of polymerisation in which the molecules of the same monomer or different monomers containing double or triple bonds add together on a large scale to form a polymer is called addition polymerisation. The addition polymerisation takes place through the formation of either free radicals or ionic species.

The addition polymerisation is broadly classified into two types depending on the nature of chain carrier i.e., ionic polymerisation and free radical polymerisation.
Ionic Polymerisation: Ionic polymerisation is of two types.

  1. Cationic polymerisation and
  2. Anionic polymerisation.

In cationic polymerisation a positive ion (or cation) is used as the chain initiator. In anionic polymerisation a negative ion (or anion) is used as chain initiator.

i) Cationic Polymerisation:
Lewis acids such as BF3, AlCl3 or SnCl2 act as chain initiators. An example for cationic polymerisation is the formation of a polyvinyl compound from its monomer. The following steps are involved.
1) Chain initiating step :
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 8

ii) Anionic Polymerisation:
Sodium in liquid ammonia, alkyl lithium compounds etc., are used as chain initiators. A negative ion or group is added to the monomer molecule. Formation of vinyl polymers is an example for anionic polymerisation.
Chain initiation step:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 9
In anionic polymerisation chain terminating step is absent.

Free Radical Polymerisation:
Several alkenes or dienes and their derivatives are polymerised in the presence of a free radical generating initiator like benzoyl peroxide, acetyl peroxide etc.

Polymerisation of ethene to polythene is an example for free radical polymerisation. A mixture of ethene with a small amount of benzoyl peroxide initiator is heated or exposed to light.

The process starts with the addition of a free radical generated by the peroxide to the ethene double bond. A new and larger free radical is generated. This step is called the chain initiating step. This radical reacts with another molecule of ethene generating a bigger radical.

The repetition of this sequence carries the reaction forward. This step is called the chain propagating step. Finally, at some stage the product radical thus formed reacts with another radical to form the polymerised product. This step is called the chain terminating step.
Chain initiation step:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 10
Chain termination step : Free radicals combine in different ways to form polythene.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 11

Condensation polymerisation :
The type of polymerisation in which monomers combine together with the loss of simple molecules like H2O, NH3 etc., is called condensation polymerisation. The polymer thus formed is called condensation polymer.
Ex : Nylon – 6, 6 is formed from hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid by condensation.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 12

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 50.
Explain the classification of polymers based on their source and structure.
Answer:
Classification based on source :
Based on source, polymers are classified into

  1. Natural polymers,
  2. Semi-synthetic polymers and
  3. Synthetic polymers.

Natural polymers : These polymers are obtained from natural sources such as plants and animals.
Ex: Starch, Rubber.

Semi-synthetic polymers: These polymers are the synthetic derivatives of natural polymers.
Ex: Cellulose acetate (rayon), Cellulose nitrate.

Synthetic polymers: These are man-made polymers. These are extensively used in daily life and in industry.
Ex : Polythene, Nylon 6, 6.

Classification based on structure :
Based on structure polymers are classified into

  1. Linear polymers,
  2. Branched chain polymers and
  3. Cross linked or Network polymers.

Linear polymers : These polymers consist of long and straight chains.
Ex : Polythene, PVC etc.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 13
Branched chain polymers: These polymers consist of linear chains having some branches.
Ex : Low Density Polythene (LDP)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 14
Cross linked or Network polymers : These are generally formed from bi-functional and tri-functional monomers and contain strong covalent bonds between various linear polymer chains.
Ex: Bakelite, Melamine.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 15

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 51.
Explain the classification of polymers based on the mode of polymerization and nature of molecular forces.
Answer:
Classification based on mode of polymerisation:
Based on mode of polymerisation polymers are classified into

  1. Addition polymers and
  2. Condensation polymers.

1) Addition polymers :
These are formed by the repeated addition of the same or different monomer molecules containing double or triple bonds.

Addition polymers formed by the polymerisation of the same monomer molecules are called homopolymers.
Ex: Polythene formed from polymerisation of ethene.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 16
Polymers formed by the addition polymerisation of two different monomeric species are called copolymers.
Ex: Buna – S formed by 1, 3 – butadiene and styrene.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 17

2) Condensation polymers:
These are formed by the repeated condensation reaction between two bi-functional monomers. In these reactions loss of simple molecules such as H2O, HCl etc. takes place.
Ex: Terylene or dacron formed by the condensation of ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid is an example for condensation polymers.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 18

Classification based on molecular forces : Based on intermolecular forces such as van der Waal’s forces and hydrogen bonds, polymers are classified into four sub groups.

  1. Elastomers,
  2. Fibres,
  3. Thermoplastic polymers,
  4. Thermosetting polymers.

Elastomers :
These are rubber – like solids with elastic properties. In these polymers, the polymer chains are held together by weak intermolecular forces. These weak forces permit the polymer to be stretched. A few cross links are introduced in between the chains which help the polymer to return to its original position after the force is released.
Ex: Buna – S, Buna – N, Neoprene etc.

Fibres:
These are thread forming solids which possess high tensile strength and high modulus. These characteristics are due to intermolecular forces like hydrogen bonding. These forces also lead to close packing of chains and impart crystalline nature.
Ex: Nylon 6, 6; terylene.

Thermoplastic polymers :
A thermoplastic polymer is one which softens on heating and becomes rigid again on cooling. This is because there are weak attractive forces between polymer molecules and these are readily disrupted on heating.
Ex: Polythene, polypropylene.

Thermosetting polymers:
A thermosetting polymer is one which becomes hard on heating. It cannot be softened by heating.
Ex: Bakelite, urea-formaldehyde resins etc.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 52.
What are synthetic rubbers ? Explain the preparation and uses of the following.
i) Neoprene
ii) Buna – N
iii) Buna – S
Answer:
Synthetic rubber is any vulcanisable rubber like polymer which is capable of getting stretched to twice its length. It returns to its original shape and size when the stretching force is removed.

i) Neoprene :
Neoprene is formed by the free radical polymerisation of chloroprene.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 19
Uses: Neoprene is used in the manufacture of conveyer belts, gaskets and hosepipes.

ii) Buna – N :
Buna – N is obtained by the copolymerisation of 1, 3-butadiene and acrylonitrile in the presence of a peroxide catalyst.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 20
Uses : Buna – N is used in making oil seals, tank lining etc.

iii) Buna – S :
Buna – S is obtained by the copolymerisation of 1, 3 – Butadiene and styrene.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 21
Uses : Buna – S is used in making automobile tyres and footwear.

Intext Questions – Answers

Question 1.
What are polymers ?
Answer:
Polymers are high molecular mass substances consisting of large number of repeating structural units. They are also called as macro-molecules.
Ex: Polythene, rubber, nylon – 6, 6 etc.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 2.
How are polymers classified on the basis of structure.
Answer:
In the basis of structure polymers are classified as below :

  1. Linear polymers
  2. Branched chain polymers
  3. Cross linked polymers

Question 3.
Write the names of monomers of the following polymers.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 22
Answer:
i) Hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid
ii) Caprolactam
iii) Tetra fluoroethene

Question 4.
Classify the following as addition and condensation polymers. Terylene, Bakelite, Polyvinyl chloride, Polythene.
Answer:
Polyvinyl chloride and polythene are addi-tion polymers Terylene and Bakelite are condensation polymers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 5.
Explain the difference between Buna- N and Buna-S.
Answer:
Buna – N is a co-polymer of 1, 3 butadiene and acrytonihide and Buna – S is a co-polymer of 1, 3 butadiene and styrene.

Question 6.
Arrange the following polymers in increasing order of their intermolecular forces.
i) Nylon – 6, 6, Buna – S, Polythene
ii) Nylon 6, Neoprene, Polyvinyl chloride
Answer:
i) Buna – S, polythene, Nylon – 6, 6
ii) Neoprene, Polyvinyl chloride, Nylon – 6